JP2015165973A - Game system and game device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To take all possible measures for a game machine doubtful of a possible fraudulent act by performing careful abnormality determination also considering to what value a reference value for controlling a game state of the game machine is set.SOLUTION: By using a threshold (TS threshold or base threshold) for abnormality determination stored in a table for each setting value of the reference value for controlling a game state of the game machine, such as a jackpot probability and a normal symbol winning probability, careful abnormality determination also considering the setting value of the reference value is performed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game is played by a player, and a valuable value owned by the player that is communicatively connected to the gaming machine and that is specified by recording information received on the recording medium and recorded on the recording medium. The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming device that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the game machine, and the gaming device.

  Conventionally, a management computer connected so as to be able to communicate with a plurality of gaming machines monitors the difference balls during the big hit of each gaming machine and determines whether or not the difference balls are abnormal based on a preset threshold. There was what to judge (patent document 1).

JP 2005-192990 A

  On the other hand, some conventional gaming machines are configured such that the game hall can change the setting of a reference value for controlling the state of the gaming machine.

  However, in the case of the one described in Patent Document 1, since the detailed abnormality determination in consideration of the reference value changed in setting is not performed, the accurate abnormality determination cannot be performed, and there is a possibility of fraud. There was a risk that a countermeasure for a certain gaming machine would be fragile.

  The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to perform detailed abnormality determination that also considers what value is set as the reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine. By doing so, it is necessary to take thorough countermeasures against gaming machines that may be fraudulent.

(1) The present invention is connected to an enclosed game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) having a circulation path through which a game is played and a game medium is circulated, and communicably connected to the game machine, Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming machine is
When a reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (a big hit probability, a probability per base figure at a low base, a probability per base figure at a high base, etc.) is changed (changed by the host server 801 etc.) A game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine according to the changed reference value;
Game information transmitting means (P-unit communication) for transmitting game information (the number of start times between special prizes (TS), base value at low base, base value at high base, etc.) generated in accordance with the progress of the game to the gaming device Control unit 81),
The gaming device is:
Settings according to a reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate (TS threshold value in FIG. 71 (a), base threshold value in FIGS. 71 (b) and (c)) ) For storing (S755 in FIG. 70B),
Based on the setting stored in the storage means, suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the game information transmission means is appropriate (S807 to S810 in FIG. 72, FIG. 73). S822, S823),
Display control means for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means.

  According to such a configuration, whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate Therefore, it is possible to make a detailed abnormality determination that takes into account what value the reference value is set to, and to take measures against possible gaming machines that may be fraudulent. Can be.

  (2) In the gaming system of (1), when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means (Y in S810, Y in S823), it is determined to be inappropriate. Error specifying information output means (S812, S835) for outputting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information is further included.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is output, it is possible to grasp the type of error that has occurred on the game hall side.

(3) In the gaming system according to the above (1) or (2), the gaming machine has a business mode (operating mode) in which a player can play a game, and maintenance of the gaming machine. It can be switched to maintenance mode (maintenance mode)
At least one of the gaming device and the gaming machine has a reference value display control means for controlling the display of the reference value when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode (the set value is displayed on the display 312 in the maintenance mode). A main control unit 323) for performing display control.

  According to such a configuration, since the reference value is displayed when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the reference value can be confirmed on the game hall side.

(4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the gaming machine performs a business mode (operation mode) in which a player can play a game and maintenance of the gaming machine. Can be switched to maintenance mode (maintenance mode)
The gaming apparatus includes an inappropriate history display control unit (maintenance mode) for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode. In some cases, a main control unit 323) that performs control to display an abnormality occurrence history on the display 312 is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the history of the gaming information determined to be inappropriate is displayed. You can check the history.

(5) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) capable of communicating with an enclosed game machine having a circulation path through which a game is played and a game medium is circulated. It is possible to play a game on the gaming machine by using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium after receiving the medium (card). A gaming device (card unit 3)
When a reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (a big hit probability, a probability per base figure at a low base, a probability per base figure at a high base, etc.) is changed (changed by the host server 801 etc.) A game information receiving means for receiving game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game from a gaming machine including a game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine according to the changed reference value. S801 and S819),
Setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game of the gaming machine controlled according to the changed reference value (FIG. 71 (a)) Storage means (S755 in FIG. 70B) for storing the TS threshold of FIG. 71B and the base threshold in FIG.
Based on the setting stored in the storage means, appropriateness determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate (S807 to S810 in FIG. 72, S822 in FIG. 73). , S823)
Display control means for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means.

  According to such a configuration, whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate Therefore, it is possible to make a detailed abnormality determination that takes into account what value the reference value is set to, and to take measures against possible gaming machines that may be fraudulent. Can be.

  (6) In the gaming device of (5) above, an error corresponding to the gaming information determined to be inappropriate when determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means (Y in S810, Y in S823) Further includes error specifying information output means (S812, S835) for outputting error specifying information for specifying the type.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is output, it is possible to grasp the type of error that has occurred on the game hall side.

  (7) In the gaming apparatus according to (5) or (6), when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode (maintenance mode), reference value display control means (maintenance) for performing control to display the reference value A main control unit 323) that controls to display the set value on the display 312 in the mode.

  According to such a configuration, since the reference value is displayed when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the reference value can be confirmed on the game hall side.

  (8) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (5) to (7), when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode (maintenance mode), the suitability determining unit determines that the gaming machine is inappropriate. Inappropriate history display control means for performing control to display the history of game information (main control unit 323 for performing control to display abnormality occurrence history on the display 312 in the maintenance mode).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the history of the gaming information determined to be inappropriate is displayed. You can check the history.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown by FIG. 5, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the CU communication control part authentication sequence shown by Fig.6 (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown by FIG.6 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the CU communication control part serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a pachinko machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the subroutine program of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before the operation instruction is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 42. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption illustrated in FIG. 43. FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption illustrated in FIG. 44. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the CU side power supply interruption shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the CU side power supply interruption shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power failure shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 53 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 56. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 57 occurs. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between a card unit and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between a card unit and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process regarding the security relevant information in a high-order server, (B) is a flowchart which shows the process regarding the security relevant information in CU. (A) is a figure which shows the big hit probability TS threshold value table, (b) is a figure which shows the threshold value table at the time of base figure probability low base, (c) is a figure which shows the threshold value table at the time base figure probability high base time It is. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by CU. It is a flowchart which shows the TS monitoring process performed by CU. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S machine and CU. It is a front view which shows the card unit and the pachinko machine in another example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side in a modification. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S stand and CU in a modification. It is a flowchart figure which shows the subroutine program in the modification of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recorded game recording media, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the cards. 2 has a function for allowing the ball to be fired and playing. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  This pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting ball launching motor (not shown) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown, but has a start port (1) and a start where a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. And a variable display device that variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is opened by a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 win at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening (not shown) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth (not shown) are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. A replay button 319 for executing the replay game, and an IR light receiving unit 320 for receiving an infrared signal from a remote control (not shown) possessed by a staff of the game hall, converting it to an electronic signal and outputting it. Yes.

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it in the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card, the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 as it is withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, main data of various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and a transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for performing Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 2 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and the RAM storage data mounted in the P-unit side payout control unit 17. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 16 (see FIG. 4), the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 (see FIG. 4) itself. Is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and the P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 42 to 57 described later, when communication is interrupted during communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication is reconnected. The SQN stored in the backup until the reconnection of communication is always the last SQN transmitted since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence time of the communication (see FIGS. 35 and 42 to 57). It has become. On the other hand, the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received in accordance with the occurrence time of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 35 and 42 to 57). The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 wins and the additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional ball counter is used to calculate the additional ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, a subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the winning numbers on the P platform side using the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P platform side to the CU side. Further, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtraction balls, and the count value of the game ball number counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, every time the value of the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter, starting port 2 winning counter, and game ball counter is transmitted to the CU side, After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area, the values of the additional ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information are set to 0. clear. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port (1) the total number of winning prizes (starting port (1) The total number of times), the start opening (2) the total number of winnings (start opening (2) total number of times), and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting port (1), (2) the total number of winnings by updating the current ball related information transmitted from the P unit one by one. Information can be managed.

  The breakdown of the “number of added balls” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit1 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is given by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, hall management). An error notification by the computer 1 may be performed), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number matching determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (storage ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of a received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU receives the ball in response to an input requesting the use of the ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 provided on the CU). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area to be stored. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own game value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the amount of the deducted ball The addition request ball number for adding the number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation for performing a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like is executed, the number of balls requested to be subtracted from the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the P platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a history of a game state generated when a player plays a game with the P table 2. For example, the start history (variable) is a variable display count of a variable display device. Display device variation start count), number of occurrences of jackpot, number of starts from previous jackpot to current jackpot, base value, and the like. This game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the P machines and game history data aggregated for each player on the P machines. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit provided on both the P machine side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P machine side and the CU side. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both of them or in the backup storage unit provided only on the P platform side. In other words, the game history data throughout the day on the P machine and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P machine are stored in both the CU 3 and the P machine 2.

  Referring to FIG. 3, when a player plays a game with P stand 2, various game data such as a big hit and start (variable display device fluctuation start) are generated, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. Is done. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the P units is totaled, for example, by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17, and the totaled game history The data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board (not shown), and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The present P game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to select and display the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The totaled game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This P stand game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured so that the game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches an operation button icon of the other P device information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P device information is displayed. The other P machine game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P machines 2 via the other CU 3, and returns the received other P machine game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other P game history data by the other P information processing unit, and processes the processed other P game history data in the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other P game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who played a game on the P platform 2 and display the game history data for each player on the display units 54 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the P unit 2. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read, and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the P stand 2 transmits the received C-ID from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292, thereby displaying the display effect. The current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, when the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is the current player of the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. If the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 54. In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also counts the game history data by the normal mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day on the P platform and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P platform are displayed on both the P platform side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When a player playing a game on the P stand 2 pushes the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, the member card is discharged from the CU 3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 deletes the C-ID and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is discharged from CU3, a card return notification is transmitted from CU to P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that receives the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when the game by the P table 2 is ended, but the player temporarily stops the game, ends the small game, and returns to the P table 2 where the game has been played again to play the game. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes a small use, and the player returns to the same P stand 2 to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 and remove the card from the P stand 2 without performing such a game interruption operation.

  In such a case, when the same player who has left the P table 2 without playing another player returns to the P table 2 and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID and game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the P table 2 inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the P table 2. Sent. In the P table 2, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played a game with the P unit 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result between the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  A comparison result between the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, and a determination result as to whether or not they match is the display effect control unit. 292, and transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, if the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the game history data management unit 391 uses the C-ID determined to match as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. Store in the data storage unit. In the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination results match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a test hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. This test hit mode is a mode in which a game machine manufacturer performs a shipment inspection at the time of game machine manufacture, an operation check at the time of game machine installation at a game hall, a display of the number of balls such as safe / out, a base check at the time of nail adjustment, etc. . When a game attendant inserts a test card for test hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read and the test hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the test hit mode. . Specifically, the test hit mode notification is transmitted to the P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the test hit mode notification transmits the test hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit. . In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores game history data based on game data generated thereafter in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hit game history data storage unit is configured by a storage area different from the P-unit game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit described above. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the part.

  The game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  Also in CU3, game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 is totaled by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is displayed in the trial hit mode. Is displayed on the display 312 as game history data.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a recount button are also displayed, and after the nail master who has viewed the game history data in the test hit mode displayed in the total display adjusts the nail based on the game history data, the game in the test hit mode is performed again. There is a case where it is desired to check the result of the nail adjustment by collecting the history data and displaying it. In such a case, the recount button icon is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P 2. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the test hit game history data storage unit, and then replays game data based on the game data generated thereafter, and stores the test hit game history data. Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit that has been newly counted is displayed on the display 54. On the other hand, on the CU 3 side, the trial hit mode processing unit uses the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game data management unit 391. And the trial hit mode game history data that has been added up again is displayed on the display 312.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card accepted by the CU 3 is ejected, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the P table 2 and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the card return notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more game balls in the trial hit mode, a game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P units to allow game balls to be added. When there are no more game balls in the test hit mode, the game machine may automatically add game balls without sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P units, thereby enabling a game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding game balls on the gaming machine side, it may be controlled so that the game can continue even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of a slot machine 2S, which will be described later, when there are no more points in the trial hit mode, a score addition command is sent from the CU side to the S units to allow the game to be added.

  The P table 2 is provided with a RAM clear switch 293. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above when operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. At the same time, the oldest stored data of 10 days of stored data in the P game history data storage unit is deleted, and the remaining 9 days of stored data are shifted one by one to the old day storage area. Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  Also, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification is the current P unit in the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is held in the CU3, even if a RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data is not cleared.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 4, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, this is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 4 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 6) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit (not shown) to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the P unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P-unit communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323 is notified that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the fact that the payout control unit 17 has detected an abnormality is detected and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 16. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout controller 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality has occurred in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 799 detects and notifies the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, this LSI 799 also does not perform control for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 799 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and do not have a function of performing abnormality notification control on their own even if an abnormality is detected. .

  In the control of FIGS. 3 and 4 described above, the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Although not shown, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described.

  Data with a transmission direction of CU to P units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of P units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is a request for clearing recovery information and backing up the connection ID (communication start time) to the P units.

  A communication start response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the P units and requests transmission of game table information such as game balls.

  An operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as game balls.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This communication disconnection request is a request for disconnecting the communication connection to the P units.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication test request notifies communication data to the P units.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  An outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. Although not shown, the transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is a command from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command requesting re-authentication with the P-unit communication control unit (P-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the P unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. Device authentication requests A and B and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication stored in the EEPROM (not shown)). Key) is a response for transmitting from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, among the commands / responses, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail.

  A recovery response is transmitted from the P units to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held by the P units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage so that when the CU sends a recovery request command to the P units as the recovery process is executed, the P units send a recovery response to the CU. That is. The recovery information transmitted from the P platform to the CU includes connection time, final sequence number, C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information.

  The column “encrypted” is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted, and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication) backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units. The C-ID is a C-ID that has been backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the previously notified game ball acquisition number information, the previously notified back ball addition information, the previously notified game ball firing number information, the previously notified symbol determination count 1, the previously notified symbol determination count 2, the previous notification The number of times of the starting port, the number of times of the starting port notified twice last time, the number of times of the first prize winning port notified last time, the number of times of the second time winning big winning port, and the number of times of winning ports 1 to 4 notified last time. As described above, the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are divided by bits, but may be divided and transmitted by bytes.

  “Game ball acquired number information” is information on the number of balls to be added to a game ball by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information for adding a foul ball detected by a foul ball detection switch (not shown) to a game ball. The “game ball firing number information” is information on the number of pachinko balls fired by a launching unit (not shown). “Out ball passage information” is information indicating that an out ball has been detected by passing through an out ball detection switch (not shown).

  In the flowcharts of FIGS. 2 and 5 to 60, “game ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “addition ball number”. Further, “game ball firing number information” is expressed as “subtraction ball number”.

  The “symbol determined number of times 1” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is the number of times the symbol has been determined by the variable display device 2.

  “Starting port number 1” is the number of pachinko ball winnings to the starting port 1. “Starting port number 2” refers to the number of times a pachinko ball is awarded to the starting port 2.

  “The number of times of the grand prize opening 1” is the number of times the grand prize opening 1 is opened (number of rounds). “The number of times of winning the prize winning opening 2” is the number of times of opening the winning opening 2 (number of rounds).

  “The number of winning holes 1 to 4” is the number of times that a pachinko ball is awarded to each of the winning holes 1 to 4.

  Further, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. Specifically, the current ball related information is information on the total number of game balls currently held by P units (also referred to as the number of game balls), information on the number of acquired game balls currently held by P units, and currently P units. Back ball addition information that is held, information on the number of game balls that are currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, current 1 start opening held by P stand, 2 start openings currently held by P stand, 1 big winning opening currently held by P stand, 1 prize opening currently held by P stand 2 times, the number of winning openings 1 to 4 currently held on the P platform.

  The information other than the previous ball related information is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  The meaning of the various balls and the contents of the confirmation points will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. Note that the CU checks whether the number of game balls of the P units matches the number of game balls after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the P units. The communication is disconnected and P games are stopped (see FIG. 35, etc.). Then, the CU executes a recovery process, and transmits a communication start request to the P machines (see FIG. 15), so that the game ball correction request is sent to the P machines in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. The P game balls are corrected to the number of game balls after being corrected on the CU side.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for the winning of the pachinko ball to the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, respectively. The CU is used to count the number of times the game table (P units) starts. Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 and the number of start ports 2 are the number of times that the pachinko balls have won the P start ports 1 and 2 and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The number of times of winning 1 and winning 2 is the number (number) of pachinko balls that have been won in P's 1 and 2 and the CU is operating a game machine (P). Use this data for status checks.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of times that the pachinko ball has been awarded to the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game machine. To do.

  The communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P machine requests the P machine to correct the game balls and the sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time).

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request for clearing the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls”, etc. to the P units is made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, it indicates that there is a game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it indicates that there is no game ball correction request.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 5 and subsequent figures, when the bit for designating the presence / absence of a request is “0”, the request is not present, and when the bit is “1”, the request is present. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. In addition, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” is “game ball correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game balls are the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

  The P units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request. When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

  Back up the connection time. In addition, each process performed with the said P units is performed in an order from the top.

  The operation instruction command transmitted from the CU to the P unit is “game ball addition”, “game ball subtraction”, “game permission / prohibition”, and “game ball and sequence number clear” operations for the P unit. And requesting transmission of various game machine information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed, and when the bit is "0", the request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request for opening a glass door (not shown) that covers the front of the game area 27 so that it can be opened and closed, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request. Bit 7 is provided as a spare.

  The “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, the “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, the “game prohibition request” is also simply referred to as “prohibition request”, and the “game ball number request” "Sequence number clear request" is also simply referred to as "clear request", and "glass door open request" is also simply referred to as "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit base of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is being performed when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1”. In some cases, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and trial hit mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  This CU state is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but it may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit4: 1 = Test card holding Bit7-5: Reserve Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan display in progress Bit9: 1 = Replay lending display in progress Bit10: 1 = Mochitama split display in progress
Bit 11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit 12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit 13: 1 = Resume It is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This data on the number of balls requested for addition indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  Data of the number of balls required for subtraction that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This subtraction request ball number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the game ball number.

  Further, card balance data indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The C-ID transmitted from the CU to the P platform is set with the following data depending on the state. When the card is not inserted, “ALL00h” is set. While the card is held, the C-ID of the card is set. “ALLFFh” is set during the test hit mode.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, the error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  The response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the game table information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear are not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  Note that “game ball number addition refusal” is simply called “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is simply called “subtraction refusal”, “game permission refusal” is also simply called “permission refusal”, and “game “Prohibition refusal” is also simply referred to as “prohibition refusal”, “game ball number and sequence number clear refusal” is also simply referred to as “clear refusal”, and “glass door open refusal” is also simply referred to as “glass open refusal”.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball acquisition number information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  “Back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by a launching unit (not shown). is there. The CU 3 adds the data of the back ball addition information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding the card. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by a launching unit (not shown), and is information of the total number when there are a plurality of balls fired at the time of transmission. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the game ball firing number information from the number of game balls currently held, but does not subtract the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card. CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by CU3 is zero. The “out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch, and is the total number when there are a plurality of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number of times 1” is symbol determination information for winning of the start port 1, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball firing number information”. Specifically, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back ball addition information−game ball firing number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of game balls (total number of game balls). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of game balls transmitted from the P units matches the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information). If they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of game balls stored in the CU are stored in the P units. Processing for correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  Bits 0 to 3 are prepared as gaming machine error status 2, but this is provided as a reserve, and is used to deal with manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. Is.

The contents of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.
The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the launch of the ball is stopped in the P platform, and then all the pachinko balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the launched balls is confirmed It is. The state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are unconfirmed is the game incomplete (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are confirmed is the completion of the game (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if the P platform has not confirmed the ball firing for 15 seconds or more, it times out and the game is completed.

  If the completion of the game has not been confirmed for 15 seconds or more and the game has been completed, and the ball clogging that has occurred in the game area has been resolved and the ball has won, etc. A display prompting reinsertion may be displayed on the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so that other cards are not accepted until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, the number of game balls is manually corrected (manual correction) by a game clerk or the like.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not the P table has game table history information such as “start count” and “big hit count”, and when it is “0”, there is no game table history information. In the case of “1”, the presence of game table history information is indicated. If the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the P machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing when data such as “start count” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the P machine, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

The contents of each bit of the game table state 2 will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.
The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base. The high base of Bit4 is set to “1” during the high base.

  The game table error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, and the contents of each bit will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.

  Bit 0 is a bit indicating whether or not the frame body (front frame), that is, the cell is being opened, and is set to “1” when the cell is being opened. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door is being opened, and is set to “1” when the glass plate (glass door) is being opened. Bit2 is set to “1” when a magnetic sensor error is detected when the magnetic sensor detects an illegal occurrence of bringing a magnet close to a game area or the like. After “1” is set, Bit 2 is set to “0” by turning on / off power of the P units.

  Bit3 is set to “1” when an illegal winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, the power is restored by turning on / off the power of P units, and Bit4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  A response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication state is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x10, it is indicated that it is abnormal. CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which occurrence of disconnection between the P platform and the CU is detected.

  The response of the device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, And MAC.

  A response of a device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is the chip ID recorded on the P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is the P payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the process of the connection sequence at the time of power activation is described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 5 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after turning off the power of the CU in a standby state where no card is inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping a game by stopping a ball striking motor (not shown) on the P platform. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of the authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence processing, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response, the P device returns a response of a device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the P devices that have responded (P devices identified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to P units.

The P devices that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 5: an authentication sequence when the power source of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power source of the P units (game machines) is activated. An authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 6A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. Then, a CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 6B shows an authentication sequence when the power source of the P machines (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 6 (b), after communication disconnection with P units is detected in main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 recovers P after communication with P units is restored. Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with P units is possible.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown) is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This writer management information is information relating to the ROM writer used when writing authentication information to an EEPROM (not shown). For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the portion, and in order to solve this, the initial vector of the CTR mode is notified to the CU 323. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) and the received time information, and performs main control as a time response. To the unit 323. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 11 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result with the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to check the device information (chip ID), and stops communication after NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the P machines thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 7, or authentication of a challenge response system is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and performs the CU communication using the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request. Transmit to the control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. Transmit to the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. The CU communication control unit transmits the serial ID authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the response code A is transmitted to the CU communication. The control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 10 may be any algorithm, but for example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 9 can be used. .

The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. In terms of the equation, the challenge code A = E _SIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. In terms of an expression, response code A = D _SIDM (challenge code A) = D _SIDM (E _SIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. In terms of the equation, challenge code B = E _SIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. _{Expressed by the} equation, response code B = D _SIDT (challenge code B) = D _SIDT (E _SIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Also create a MAC. This MAC is the Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the original plaintext random number A by decrypting the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the random number A is generated as the predetermined random number A. The MAC is calculated using a hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to obtain the original plaintext random number B. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to a new authentication key transmitted from the higher-level server 801, and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the higher-level server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs processing to update the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and performs the main control using the result as an authentication key update response. To the unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM (not shown). The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the EEPROM (not shown) of the main control unit 323 is shown. ) Stores the authentication key.

  Referring to FIG. 13, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving the request, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 13 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 9 or FIG.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key information stored in the EEPROM (not shown). Is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in an EEPROM (not shown), and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating the storage to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 5, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the P units. In response to this, the P machine returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control unit 17) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information. In the following flowcharts, “recovery data” refers to the various data described above. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the P unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU has retransmitted the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the P units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sends a communication start request (recovery clear ON). As commands, a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the “P” matches the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P table with the information of the CU (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. In the case of the P unit, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) Back up the data of = 0. Further, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2), which are current ball related information, to zero. Then, as for the P platform, as operation response, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0 and the game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 on the basis of the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of start ports (1) = 0, and the total number of start ports (2) = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request presence, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h operation instruction to the P units, As follows: Game refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start port (2) times = 0, and a game permission response is returned to the CU.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 7, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 14 is executed. FIG. 14A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 14B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 14A, after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) of the operation instruction message as a communication state response (not shown).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 14B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 14A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the response of the transmitted communication status response is numerical data other than 0x00. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of retry executions is one in FIG. 14B, but may be executed two or more times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the P stand are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power is activated while holding the card in FIG. 28, or when the P unit in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting, b. The connection sequence after the communication is disconnected by sending a communication disconnection request. (See FIG. 35), or c. The SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P platform are inconsistent. When it is determined that the normal communication has not ended (abnormal end), the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 15 instead of FIG. 5 is executed.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 5, and the differences will be mainly described here.

  First, the time when P devices prohibit the game and start communication is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 5 is when the power is turned on, a recovery clear ON communication start request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit clears the recovery data in response to the command. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 according to SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the previous ball related information and current ball related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence in FIG. 15, since it is a reconnection time, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, the game balls and the like are corrected in accordance with the contents of the recovery data (the previous ball related information, the current ball related information, etc.) on the P platform included in the recovery response. Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired and performs processing to correct the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls. Recovery data from the corrected number of game balls and P units Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  The CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P units at the stage where the recovery process is completed, and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of the current game balls included in is converted to a one-handed ball. The “mochidama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, as in the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 5, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the number of additional balls, subtracted balls The counter values of the number, the number of start ports (1) and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

With reference to FIG. 16, the processing of the CU and the P unit when a card is inserted will be described.
When a card is inserted, the CU outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information. The card insertion process is executed.

  In this insertion process, a card insertion request command for reading the C-ID recorded on the inserted card by the CU and transmitting the C-ID to the P units is transmitted to the P unit. In response to this, the P device returns a response of the card insertion response notifying the CU that the reception of the C-ID is completed to the CU. Further, as this insertion processing, control as shown in FIG. 17 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is done by inquiring about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the upper-level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that it is in the middle of executing the process of displaying on the display 312 and displaying on the P-side display 54. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 and the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display 312 is being inquired, and issues an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to P units. In the P platform, by receiving the command of the operation instruction, the display control command including the display control command 292 including the display control command including the card holding ON and the card insertion processing ON is displayed. It transmits to a control board, and the control which displays that the display effect control board is inquiring of the card | curd inserted in the display 54 is performed (refer FIG. 60).

  After that, as for P, as operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtracting balls = 0, number of starting ports = 0, number of starting ports = 2, game A response including OFF, prohibition, special prize, and probability change is transmitted to the CU. Specifically, when the special prize and the probability change are OFF, Bits 0 to 4 in the gaming machine state 2 are all 0.

  The CU determines the balance and the ball when the card balance and the ball that has been inserted as a result of the inquiry about the card balance can be confirmed. In the CU, control is performed to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312, and addition display that is in the process of transmitting the confirmed holding ball (5000) as a gaming ball to the gaming machine (P units). The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 60).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of balls required for addition) = 5000 and backed up balls = 0. At this point, the consumption of the ball is finalized.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is P Send to the stand. In addition, operation instructions during card holding and card insertion processing are divided into membership cards and visitor cards, and the operation instructions are transmitted separately for each type of card. May be displayed. In the P unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000, display control including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 is performed. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control board displays on the display 54 that 5000 balls are being added as game balls (during addition display) (see FIG. 60).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the insertion time process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 17, CU performs each step of S1-S7. In addition, S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by P units. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by the display effect control board provided on the P platform, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is performed by the display effect control unit 292. Is sent to the payout control unit 17 and the payout control unit 17 sends it to the CU.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupting operation shown in FIG. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the suspended card. If not, the inserted card is inserted in S5. Eject the card and enter standby.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the card that has been suspended, it is determined that the suspended player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the P cards is performed in S3. The P units receive the C-ID and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 3) (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Since the display control means (display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292) is provided, it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control unit 17 side). The common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the display control means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, which enables mass production of a small number of communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data and the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 stores the received game history data and C-ID as a backup.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 3), and the game history data is restored. The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, a process is performed in S13. Further, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a process for consuming the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the processing of FIG. 18, the prepaid balance is “1000”, and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command with no addition, addition display OFF, SQN = n, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 0, and number of balls required for subtraction = 0 is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 50, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) A response indicating that the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of ball to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 Back up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands with addition being present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command to the display effect control board. In response, the display effect control board causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P platform has SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-added ball count = 0, pre-subtracted ball count = 0, front start port (1) number of times = 0, and front start port (2) number of times = 0. After backing up and creating a response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to 0, and the current number of game balls is 50 The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 to which the number of balls requested for addition 125 is added.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start Mouth (2) Number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, probability change OFF response is returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls for subtraction) = 175 The cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and the starting port (2) cumulative = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls with and without addition is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the process at the time of replay which consumes a stored ball is demonstrated. In FIG. 19, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 19 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card, SQN = n + 2 , C-ID, number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls requested to be added) = 125, storage balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the balance in the case of FIG. 18 is data in monetary units, while the holding balls in FIG. 19 are data in units of balls, so that it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU sends, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 125, number of balls required = 875, number of balls required for subtraction = 0 to P units. To do. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command to the display effect control board. In response, the display effect control board causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  The other processing is the same as the processing in FIG. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the process of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service or the like) according to an instruction on the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 to place a wagon order, whereby the order contents ordered by the player are transmitted from the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 to the infrared ray receiving unit 320. As a signal, it is input to a remote control owned by a game shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 20 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls is generated in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game balls accompanying the occurrence of the wagon order, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction Do. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command of subtraction present, subtraction display ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 0, and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display an indication that the subtraction is being performed (displaying) (not shown).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 20, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board. In response to this, the display effect control board displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P platform backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 0, number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, number of front start ports (1) = 0 and number of front start ports (2) = 0 In addition, the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) is cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of current game balls = 700, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF response are returned.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls added) −0 (number of balls subtracted) = 700 Then, the number of game balls is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up C-ID, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and starting port (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 19, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the accumulated (contained) consumption based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU accepts the retained consumption.

  In this way, the reason for determining the different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls, such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, for “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction from the CU”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so the P units are stored when the instruction reaches the P units. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “save (contained ball) consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the storage (contained) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a process when a big hit occurs during a game will be described. In FIG. 21, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and a probability variation big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being transmitted and received between the P units and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n, C-ID is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, C-ID is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In the P-unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 13, number of front start ports (1) = 1, and number of front start ports (2) = 1 , The number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (the number of added balls) −13 (the number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  And as for P platform, as operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000, number of addition balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P platform in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, and therefore, one pachinko ball is shot into the game area in 0.6 seconds. Will be included. Since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of balls to be subtracted between the previous response transmission and the current response transmission is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port (1) Accumulation = 1 and Start port (2) Accumulation = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 120, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 20, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, and the number of front start ports (2) = 2 is backed up, and the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1100, number of added balls = 120, number of subtracted balls = 20, start port (1) number of times = 2, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 2, the game is possible, the special prize ON, and the special prize ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, and corrects and backs up the number of game balls in the 1100, and the cumulative number of balls = 120, The total number of subtraction balls = 20, the starting port (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are backed up. Further, the CU detects that the “special prize” has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a process when it is detected that there is no game ball while playing with P cars will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, first, the CU backs up SQN = n and C-ID, and sends commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n, C-ID to the P units as operation instructions. . In the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 18, front start port (1) times = 1, and front start port (2) times = 1 are backed up. . Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 5, number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 18, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated and then the number of game balls is corrected and backed up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18 , Starting port (1) cumulative = 0 and starting port (2) cumulative = 0. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The starting port (2) number of times fluctuates to zero. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, no balls are detected in the P units, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 so that the ball cannot be hit into the game area. Control to prohibited state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a start memory at the start port (1) count or the start port (2) count at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2, C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 5, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 Are backed up and a response is created, and then the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P platform has SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 5, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2). The response of the number of times = 0, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port (1) Cumulative = 1, and start port (2) Cumulative = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform ball hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the motion response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When hitting ball stop control is first performed on the P platform side, there is a possibility that a pachinko ball will be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the other hand, although the number of game balls has already become “0”, a new subtraction ball number is generated and eventually the game ball number becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself, this control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Although the example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown here, the main control board 16 may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits driving of a ball striking motor (not shown).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, an operation instruction from the CU to the P unit, and in response to an operation response from the P unit to the CU, when the return button 322 is pressed, the CU As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2, and a command of C-ID are transmitted to the P units. In the P platform, in accordance with the instruction with the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) is stopped to control the ball striking stop. Thereafter, a waiting time of 15 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until all balls that have already been shot flow down in the game area 27 and flow to the out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. During the 15 second wait time, polling is continued between the P units and the CU. As an operation response during the wait time, the P platform is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. As an operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID to the P units.

  Then, as a response after 15 seconds have passed, the P platform is SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, The operation response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. This “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls in the P units. The number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are not changed by the floating ball. If a prize is generated by a floating ball, or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “added ball number”.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2)” included in the motion response, the stored “number of game balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “the number of subtraction balls, start opening (1) total winning prize, starting opening (2) total winning prize” is updated. As a result, the number of game balls at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU sends a command including clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 3, and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction. Thereafter, the CU causes the display 312 to display a message indicating that clearing is being performed (clearing is being displayed) (not shown). This “clear request exists” is data instructing initialization of the number of P game balls.

  In the P platform, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board. In response to this, the display effect control board causes the display 54 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU receives the input of the “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. With clear request present, during clear display, the P units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID shift the game history data and C-ID currently updated and stored in the storage area and store them in the backup area .

  Next, as for the operation P, the clear rejection OFF not to reject the clear request as an operation response, SQN = 0, C-ID, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the start port (1) Number of times = 0, start port (2) Number of times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF responses are transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and holding balls = 500. This holding ball = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of game balls received immediately before the clear request, to the holding ball.

  After that, the CU records the holding ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. After that, as for the P platform, as the operation response, SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0, the game prohibition, the game completion ON, the special prize OFF, and the probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  In FIG. 23, there is shown a weight of 15 seconds for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side. In addition, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the winning prize The number of balls = 0 may be determined, or the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch = 0 may be determined to determine that the processing of the floating balls has ended. It may be determined that the processing of the floating ball has ended when the earlier condition of such a determination and the elapse of 15 seconds is satisfied, and the game completion may be turned ON. Further, when the game completion is turned ON based on the passage of 15 seconds, even if the CU that has received the game completion ON is timed out when, for example, 20 seconds elapses from the card return operation or the like, Good. Also, when the game completion is turned on based on the passage of 15 seconds, or when the card discharge process is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the number of winning balls ≦ predetermined threshold value Alternatively, it may be executed on condition that the number of shot balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch ≦ a predetermined threshold value.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the game is interrupted.

  It is similar to the processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 23, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can finish the use, and the player calls a store clerk at the game hall and asks the store clerk to perform a remote control operation to interrupt the game. Then, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the infrared signal output from the remote controller, converts it into an electronic signal, and inputs it to the main control unit 323. In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the P machines. As a result, the P machines store and hold data (C-ID, number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, other players' games are prohibited during the interruption (see FIG. 17).

  With reference to FIG. 25, the process when the glass door is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, if a trouble occurs such as a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 on the P platform, the player calls the attendant at the game hall. An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door by operating the remote controller is transmitted to the IR light receiving unit 320. Receiving it, the IR light receiving unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform in order to perform the ball hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops driving the hitting ball firing motor (not shown) and controls the hitting ball firing stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a 10-second wait is provided. During this time, the CU continues to poll by sending a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, a prohibition request, to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction of opening the glass for unlocking and opening the glass door and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P platform as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, in the P platform, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is energized to unlock the glass door to open the glass door, turn on the bit during the development of the glass door, and then the glass door closes. It remains ON (until a detection signal is input from a glass door closing detector (not shown)). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, game prohibition, and glass development students as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned, it is determined that the glass door is opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 26 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference from the processing of FIG. 25 is that when a glass door opening instruction input is detected in the CU, not only a prohibition request for instructing a game prohibition request but also a glass door unlocked and opened. A command with a glass opening request indicating the request is transmitted to the P units. In response to this command, the P platform stops driving the ball striking motor (not shown) to control the ball striking stop, and until all balls fired in the game area 27 flow into the out balls and are collected. 10 seconds, that is, the waiting time for floating ball processing is taken into consideration, and a weight of 10 seconds is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P platform continue to transmit / receive operation instructions / operation responses. Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to unlock the glass door and open the glass door. Then, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned on, and thereafter, the bit is kept on until the glass door is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector is inputted).

  And as for P platform, glass opening refusal OFF which does not refuse opening of a glass door as an operation response, a game prohibition which shows that it is in the state where ball hitting is stopped, and that the lock of the glass door is released and it is being opened A response including data such as that during glass development is shown to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door has been opened by receiving an operation response indicating that the glass opening rejection is OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 26 is characterized in that the 10-second wait process considering the floating ball process waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a process for releasing and releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote controller to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 5, infrared light including a cell release command signal is output from the remote controller to the IR light receiving unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR light receiving unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data such as prohibition request existence and cell opening request absence data for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor and controls the hitting ball firing stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is received. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases a front frame by exciting a front frame release solenoid (not shown) to unlock the front frame. Then, the bit during cell development is turned ON, and thereafter, it is kept ON until the cell is closed (until a detection signal is input from the front frame closing detector (not shown)).

  And as for the P platform, as an operation response, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request, game prohibition indicating that it is in a ball hitting stop state, cell development underway indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  In the process when the cell shown in FIG. 27 is opened, the P platform side has a function of providing a 10-second weight in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, as in the modification shown in FIG. When the command input for cell opening is detected, the CU sends a command including instructions for prohibition request and cell opening request to the P units, and the P unit side receives the command and performs the hit ball firing prohibition control. After that, the operation instruction / response is continued between the 10-second wait period CU and the P platform, and when the 10-second wait time has elapsed, the front frame opening solenoid is excited to release the lock on the front frame. Then, the response may be transmitted to the CU after the cell opening rejection is turned off and the cell development data is included.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a process when the power is activated while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality in which the P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while the card was inserted and the P unit was playing, the recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the P units. Nevertheless, if no response is returned from the P units, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the P units. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. And a control to turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp. A device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when a store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR light receiving unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. The command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer. Upon receiving this, the card reader / writer discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P units and performs a restart process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 15). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state in which a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 15 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction balls between the time when P connection failure occurs and the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 15) is executed until the first operation response is transmitted by P units. Processing when a number (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart processing of FIG. Referring to FIG. 15, the CU receives the recovery response from P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls that is the calculation result = J + r is backed up. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 15, SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of game balls are transmitted to P units, and the SQN of P units and the number of game balls And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a process when an operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 21 and the like, the P platform receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and obtains the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number data stored in the current ball related information storage area. The back-up information is stored in the front ball related information storage area as the number of pre-addition subtraction balls and the number of previous start openings. However, in the case of FIG. 29, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port (1) = 1, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 30, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the above-described backup clear process is executed, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is executed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start port count data are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction balls count and the previous start aperture count, and an action response command is created to present the current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 0. Is sent to the CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the data of the number of times of the previous start port without clearing the data Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the current number of starting ports. As a result, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front start ports (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added and subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. And as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1 Send the response to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage on the previous ball related information, as described above, creates a response of the operation response, and returns it to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 485, the number of additional balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of times of start port (2) = 2 as operation responses. To the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 30, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, processing when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, the number of balls to be added when there is an operation for replaying a stored ball or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125, and first, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate the current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the start as an operation response Mouth (2) Response of number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a process when the operation response from the P units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls is 520 and an operation for using the game as a replay of stored balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and a request for adding 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls requested for addition = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 630, number of addition balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtraction balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update in response to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a process when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach the P units will be described. A case will be described where an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P-unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as with the processing in FIG. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 190, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 Is sent to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game ball in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of subtraction request balls to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls only after the response including the motion response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P device for the period of waiting for the motion response from the P device. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for a response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a process when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that the transmission is a transmission, the received command includes the number of subtraction request balls = 300, but the game balls are not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  In addition, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 21, number of start ports (1) = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction update is not performed while receiving the subtraction request ball count = 300, and the subtraction update is not performed twice in response to the subtraction request. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are sent to the CU . Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Don't do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a process when the P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request will be described. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and as the operation instruction from the CU, there is no request, SQN = n, C-ID commands are P units Sent to. The P platform calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 3-23 = 500, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), SQN = n + 1, and C− An operation response including ID data is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects it to game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including addition request present, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving the request, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  In addition, as for recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition number of balls = 6, number of previous subtraction balls = 36, previous start port (1) number = 2, previous start as recovery data Number of mouths (2) = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, Current number of added balls = 3, Current number of subtracted balls = 13, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 1, Current starting port (2 ) Store data of number of times = 1.

  Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the P platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 15, and the CU transmits a command including the game ball correction ON and the game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence is restarted after sending a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 15 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation in FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 35, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process when the P units return a subtraction rejection response to the CU subtraction request will be described. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command of subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, as for the operation P, the subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 and the response of start port (2) number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a process when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU, as with the processing instruction in FIG. 23, has a prohibition request for prohibiting the game and clears it as an operation instruction. A command including unrequested data is transmitted to the P units. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the process of FIG. 23, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a command for clear request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units. Receiving it, the P stand indicates that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) times = 1, start port (2) number of times = 2 response of operation response is transmitted to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 38, a process when the P units return a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be shot, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a process when the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When the input of the glass door opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 40, as in the process of FIG. A command to request no glass opening is sent to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown), and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for glass opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform sends a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open the glass door” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process when the P units return a cell open rejection response to the CU cell open request will be described. When the input of the instruction to open the cell is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 41, the CU first uses the prohibition request and cell as an operation instruction, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown), and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. The number of game balls is initially 520 and SQN = n and an operation instruction command is transmitted to the P machines. The P machines, as operation responses, have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls. A response including addition / subtraction data of = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches the CU, after the SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of game balls = 500, when a power failure occurs in the CU, the commands from the CU are not transmitted to the P units thereafter. . In the case of the P unit, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown) is stopped to enter the play stop state. . Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed as in the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. As the initial number of game balls = 520, the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 500, number of additional balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 23, After the response of the start port (1) count = 1 and the start port (2) count = 1 is sent to the CU and the CU modifies it to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU No request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID commands are transmitted to P units. If the command does not reach the P unit and the power is cut off at the CU immediately after that, the P unit determines that the communication has been interrupted if the command has not been received for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response. Then, the transition to the unconnected state is made, and at the same time, the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed as in the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 2, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 2 and send it as a recovery response to the CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Performs processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. After the initial number of game balls = 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent and received back and forth between the CU and the P unit, then no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID operation instruction command Is transmitted to the P units, and the P units respond as SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 470, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 The response of start port (2) times = 2 was sent to the CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If the command is not transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor (not shown) is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed as in the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470-3 = 467, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive number of balls = 3, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 0, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 0 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) −3 (current number of subtracted balls) = 467, Total number of balls added = 6 (current number of added balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls = 36 (current number of subtracted balls) + 3 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 42 occurs. (A) shows a case where the CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where the P units are replaced with a new P unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 45 (a) shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced with the CU that is aged by the unit stocker, connected to the P unit, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the connected party (P units) is different based on the device information response sent from the P units, and the recovery data of the P units is not used for correction of the game balls. In this case, since the P units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the number of game balls on the card is manually corrected by the POS at the game hall. Specifically, the maintenance screen is displayed on the P platform side so that unsent data to the CU can be confirmed, and if unsent data is displayed, it is artificially performed by a game store clerk. Perform manual correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of the artificial manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under a certain condition as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives a recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of game balls = 470, cumulative ball total = 6, subtractive ball cumulative = 36, starting port 1 cumulative = 2, starting port 2 cumulative = 2
In addition, when the determination result of C-ID does not correspond, the process which transmits the present game ball number contained in the recovery response to the high-order server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up continuation of such a game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and associates it with the member card as the current number of game balls backed up. Discharge and exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who gave up continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of game balls is backed up, and the player who visits the store again reads the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and uses the current number of game balls backed up as a ball to the member card. They may be discharged in association with each other so that prizes can be exchanged.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of game balls and the C-ID are transmitted from the unit stocker together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801. , The new CU connected to the P unit transmits the game ball number data corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 stores the data such as the number of game balls of both players. Control may be performed so as to confirm whether or not they match. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the P platform, the CU may perform data correction by downloading the recovery data from the host server 801. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801 and stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, and is exchanged for a new CU and connected to the P units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows a case where the P base is replaced with a new one after the power is turned off. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the connected P units are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The original P units of recovery data that was installed before the new P units were replaced are manually corrected by the POS under the intervention of a game hall clerk.

  FIG. 46 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 43 occurs. In the control of FIG. 46, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 47 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 44 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 47, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Initial number of game balls = 520 and prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. When this command does not reach the P platform, the P platform detects a disconnection when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted, and a ball hitting motor (not shown). Is stopped and the play is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to the P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the start ports. (2) Send the response of number = 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P unit, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown) is stopped to enter the play stop state. . Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed as in the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 592, Current number of added balls = 0, Current number of subtractive balls = 3, Current start port (1) number of times = 0, Current start port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previous addition balls) +0 (the number of current addition balls) −36 (the number of previous subtraction balls) −3 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 592. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 50 shows the control in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 48 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 50, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 49 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 51, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a request for a wagon service or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2, subtraction request ball count = 300, and has a subtraction request as an operation instruction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, And a command of the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects a disconnection at the stage where the command is not received after the last response is transmitted for 4 seconds, and a ball hitting motor (not shown). Is stopped and the play is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units, and the backup value is based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, and the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and A command with the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to the P units.

  In response to this, PQ receives SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 170, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting ports (1) = 2, and starting port (2) The response of the number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P unit, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown) is stopped to enter the play stop state. . Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and P units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 167, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 3, Current starting port (1) number of times = 0, Current starting port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on the data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of balls added previously) +0 (the number of balls added previously) −36 (the number of balls previously subtracted) −3 (the number of balls currently subtracted) = 467, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by transmitting a device information request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P units do not match, and FIG. The connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 15 is executed instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN, and the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 15). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 54 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 52 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 54, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 55 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 53 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 55, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 56, as in the process of FIG. 23, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data of prohibition request existence and prohibition request absence data for prohibiting a game as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 23, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and sends a command including SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction, clear request present, clear display, but the command reaches the P units. If not, the P platform stops the play by detecting the disconnection and stopping the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Put it in a state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the P platform perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, as the previous number of balls, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous starting ports (1) = 0, the number of previous starting ports ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (current game balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, start opening (1) Accumulation = 0, start port (2) Accumulation = 0

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the clear request. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 57, as in the process of FIG. 23, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating that there is a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 23, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including clear request, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, and response of start port (2) number of times = 0 are sent to the CU . If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P device, if the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state.

  Next, when the power failure is recovered in the CU and started up, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. 15, and the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. CU and P stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 0, the number of previous subtraction balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 0, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  FIG. 58 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 56 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 58, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 59 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 57 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 59, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P base side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 16 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 60, in the state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. A reply is sent from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 60, “None” is displayed in the “Card type” title column on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 60, the P display units 54 have “0 ball” in the title column of “game ball” and the title column of “card balance”. “0 yen” is displayed. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 60, the number of start times, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, and the number of times of the highest consecutive number are displayed, and the number of start times between special prizes (effective start winnings between one big hit and the next big hit) Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting and touching, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 60, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, replay can be performed using the possessed ball or the stored ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. It can be terminated at its own timing on the P platform side without transmitting a command or the like, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  Next, a detailed example of a communication command between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 will be described. (A) Start instruction (payout control unit → display effect control board), (B) gaming machine information notification (payout control board → display effect control board), and (C) card insertion request (payout control) There is a command related to board → display control board for display.

  In the above (A) to (C), information such as a provider of information about a command to be transmitted, a transmission source, and a reception destination is associated in a table format with respect to various commands. The command communicated between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board basically includes transmission data (business message) and sum (SUM) value (communication frame error detection data) data. This is frame data having a frame configuration arranged in this order. In this command, the sum value is calculated from the addition result of all data other than the sum value.

  The command for command (A) activation instruction is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board, and notifies the display effect control board that power is turned on. The start instruction command includes a command code as transmission data.

  The gaming machine information notification of the command (B) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, and the gaming machine information is sent to the display effect control board. To be notified. In the game machine information notification, as transmission data, command code, game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing information, symbol confirmation Number of times 1, Symbol determination number 2, Start port 1 time, Start port 2 times, Start port 3 times, Grand prize port 1 time, Grand prize port 2 times, Winner port 1 time, Winner port 2 times, Winner port 3 times, Winning mouth 4 times, gaming machine state 1, gaming machine state 2, gaming machine error state 1, gaming machine error state 2, CU state, card balance, operation mode switching preparation designation, operation mode switching designation, game ball total number information, In addition, maintenance contents or test contents are included.

  Game ball total number information, game ball earned number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing information, symbol determination number 1, symbol determination number 2, start port 1 time, start 2 times of mouth, 3 times of start mouth, 1 time of big prize opening, 2 times of big prize opening, 1 time of prize opening, 2 times of prize opening, 3 times of prize opening, and 4 times of prize opening. The payout control unit 17 can obtain these data based on the data provided from the main control board 16 and the like, and transmits these data as game machine information notification data.

  For gaming machine state 2, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7 is used to indicate “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 3”, “big hit 4”, “big hit end display”, “high base” ”,“ High probability ”, and“ Waiting for customer ”. The payout control unit 17 can obtain the game table state 2 data provided from the main control board 16.

  For the gaming machine error state 1, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7 is used to indicate that “a magnet sensor error is occurring”, “a radio wave sensor error is occurring”, and “an illegal winning error is occurring” (Bit1 to 0, 7 to 5). Is “reserved”). The payout control unit 17 can obtain the data of the gaming machine error state 1 based on the gaming machine error state 1 provided from the main control board 16.

  For the gaming machine error state 2, the “common error number between devices” (Bit 0 to 6) is indicated by 1 byte of Bit 0 to Bit 7, and an error (Bit 7: 1) at the main control board or an error at the payout control unit (Bit 7: 0) is instructed. The payout control unit 17 can obtain the game table error state 2 data provided from the main control board 16.

  Regarding the CU state, in this example, 2 bytes of Bit0 to Bit15 are used to indicate that “card insertion processing”, “cash insertion processing”, “general card holding”, “member card holding”, “test card holding” ”,“ Prepaid loan display ”,“ Replay loan display ”,“ Mobama split display ”,“ Wagon service display ”,“ Clear display ”, and“ Resting ”(Bit7-5, Bit15) -14 are designated as “standby”). The payout control unit 17 can obtain the data from the CU state data provided from the card unit 3.

  As for the card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3, the balance is designated by 2 bytes.

  As for the operation mode switching preparation designation, the operation mode switching preparation designation of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7.

  As operation modes, “operation mode” in the operating state, “test card insertion mode” in the test card insertion state, “maintenance mode” for daily cleaning, replacement of consumables, and failure / repair of equipment, and nails There are multiple modes: "Test mode" for checking the results of adjustment and base adjustment, and checking the operation at the time of installation, and "Test mode" used for analyzing the operation at the time of game machine production and market return. . The operation mode is switched when a predetermined switching condition as described later is satisfied.

  As the operation mode switching preparation designation, the operation mode preparation designation is made when Bit0 is “1”, the test card insertion mode preparation designation is made when Bit1 is “1”, and the maintenance mode preparation designation is made when Bit2 is “1”. Yes, when the bit 3 is “1”, the test hit mode preparation is designated, and when the bit 4 is “1”, the test mode preparation is designated (bits 7 to 5 are reserved). It can be obtained from the operation mode switching preparation designation data provided from the card unit 3.

  Regarding the operation mode switching designation, the switching designation of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7.

  As operation mode switching designation, when Bit0 is “1”, operation mode switching is designated, when Bit1 is “1”, test card insertion mode switching is designated, and when Bit2 is “1”, maintenance mode switching is designated. When Bit 3 is “1”, trial mode switching is designated, and when Bit 4 is “1”, test mode switching is designated (Bits 7 to 5 are reserved). It can be obtained from the operation mode switching designation data provided from the card unit 3.

  As for the maintenance content or test content, when the operation mode switching designation is Bit2 “1” and the maintenance mode switching designation is made, the maintenance contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to 7 (Bit7 to 4). Is spare). On the other hand, when Bit 4 is “1” in the operation mode switching designation and the test mode switching designation is made, the test contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bits 0 to 7 (Bits 7 to 4 are reserved). It can be obtained from maintenance content or test content data provided by the command from the card unit 3.

  The card insertion request of command (C) is data transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 table, and transmits a card ID (C-ID). The command for requesting card insertion includes a command code and a card ID as transmission data.

  The card ID is the same data as the above-described operation mode switching designation, and can be obtained from the card ID data provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  Next, a communication sequence between the card unit 3 and an LSI (including a payout control unit) 799, a communication sequence between the LSI (including a payout control unit) 799 and the main control board 16, and an LSI (including a payout control unit) ) A representative example of a communication sequence between 799 and the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 will be described.

  61 and 62 are diagrams showing a typical example of a communication sequence between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17. 63 and 64 are diagrams showing a representative example of a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16. 65 to 68 are diagrams showing representative examples of communication sequences between SI799 and the display effect control board on which the display effect control unit 292 is provided. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display example on the display unit 54. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification.

  61 and 65 show communication sequences executed between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 and between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 based on card insertion. ing.

  Referring to FIG. 61, in card unit 3, when a card is inserted, information such as a card balance and a card ID recorded on the inserted card is read by a card reader / writer. Then, although not shown in the figure, from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, as operation instructions, a sequence number, card holding ON (holding a general card, holding a membership card), and card insertion processing ON are performed. In addition, data including OFF during pre-paid lending display and replay lending display is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the sequence number that has been added and updated is transmitted to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Referring to FIG. 65, the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction is in a card information inquiry state, and a display effect provided with a display effect control unit 292 from the payout control unit 17. Data including a card insertion processing display ON is transmitted to the control board as a gaming machine information notification. Referring to FIG. 65, the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 causes the display 54 to display a waiting-for-customer animation in a state where no card is inserted. When the notification is received, control is performed to switch the display on the display unit 54 to the communication animation display (animation display indicating that communication with the card unit 3 is being performed).

  Referring to FIG. 61, when the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the dispensing control unit 17 as a card insertion request. In the card unit 3, a process for inquiring the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801 is performed.

  Upon receiving such a card insertion request from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17 and, as shown in FIG. As the insertion request, data including the received card ID is transmitted to the display effect control board. In this way, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  With reference to FIG. 65, the display effect control board that has received the card insertion request, based on the received card ID, the card ID of the membership card, the general card, or the test card inserted into the card unit 3, Acquired and stored (saved) in the card ID storage unit of the display effect control board.

  Then, the display effect control board determines whether or not the received card ID matches the card ID stored last time, and if it matches, the future game result is stored in the personal game history data stored last time. The processing used in combination with is performed. On the other hand, if they do not match, the personal game history data stored last time is cleared, and the future game results are used as new personal game history data.

  In addition, in the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, as described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID. However, the payout control is performed separately from the display effect control board. In the unit 17 as well, a game history data storage unit may be provided in the LSI 799, and the game history data may be accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit in association with the card ID. Specifically, when the payout control unit 17 stores the card ID received from the card unit 3, the game history data aggregated by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is used as the card ID. The game history data storage unit may be stored in association with the game history data. When such a configuration is adopted, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the payout control unit 17 also obtains the card ID in the same manner as the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292.・ Save and determine whether the received card ID matches the previously stored card ID. If they match, add the future game results to the previously stored personal game history data. Process to be used. On the other hand, if they do not match, the personal game history data stored last time is cleared, and the future game results are used as new personal game history data.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  When the card unit 3 receives the card insertion response and the inquiry result that the card ID is normal is obtained, the operation number is the sequence number, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, data including addition request balls, and card balance are transmitted to the payout control unit 17, and sequence number data and game ball (addition request balls) data in the transmission data are stored in the backup recording area. To do. In such a state, the card unit 3 performs a control for displaying on the display 312 that a game ball is being added indicating that a game ball is being added.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, according to the received data, the gaming machine includes game ball number related information, card balance, card insertion processing display OFF, and addition display ON. The information notification is transmitted to the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292. In the display effect control board, when such a gaming machine information notification is received, the display 54 is controlled to switch the display to the animation display during addition (animation display indicating that addition is in progress).

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction transmits data including a sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Thereafter, the addition display ends in the card unit 3, and as the operation instruction, data including a sequence number, ON during card holding, OFF during card insertion processing, OFF during addition display, the number of balls required for addition, and a card balance are paid out. Transmit to the control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, according to the received data, a game machine information notification including OFF during addition display is provided. Send to control board. In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when such a gaming machine information notification is received, the display 54 performs control to end the adding animation display.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction transmits data including a sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, a communication sequence when the operation mode shifts from the operation mode to the test card insertion mode will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 62, in card unit 3, when a test card is inserted, information such as a card ID recorded on the inserted card is read by a card reader / writer. Then, although not shown, data including a sequence number, card holding ON (test card holding ON), and card insertion processing ON is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 (not shown). The

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the sequence number that has been added and updated is transmitted to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  When the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the dispensing control unit 17 as a card insertion request. In the card unit 3, a process for inquiring the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801 is performed.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request from the card unit 3 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17 and receives the received card as a card insertion request. Data including the ID is transmitted to the display effect control board. In this way, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  In the card unit 3, when the card insertion response is received and the inquiry result that the card ID is normal is obtained, the data including the test card insertion mode preparation designation ON of the operation mode switching preparation designation is provided as the operation instruction. This is transmitted to the payout control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, a test card insertion mode for specifying operation mode switching preparation is provided on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board in accordance with the received data. Data including the preparation specification ON is transmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 63, payout control unit 17 switches operation mode as a base state inquiry request to main control board 16 according to data including test card insertion mode preparation designation ON received from card unit 3. Data including preparation-designated test card insertion mode preparation designation ON is transmitted. The main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request.

  As shown in FIG. 63, although not shown until the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, the test card insertion mode transition rejection of the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response is rejected. Data including the same test card insertion mode transition refusal ON is transmitted. On the other hand, when the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, data including test card insertion mode transition rejection OFF is transmitted. As a result, when the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, the game machine completes preparation for shifting to the test card insertion mode.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such a table state inquiry response is received from the main control board 16, control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed according to the received data. 62, with reference to FIG. 62, the payout control unit 17 waits until all the game balls are discharged from the game board surface, and is a response to the operation instruction of the test card insertion mode preparation designation ON. As a response, data including the test card insertion mode transition permission OFF is transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, it is notified that the operation mode switching preparation of the entire gaming machine is completed.

  When preparations for switching the operation mode of the entire gaming machine are completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including a test card insertion mode switching specification ON for specifying the operation mode switching to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the test card insertion mode switching designated for the operation mode switching is performed on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board according to the received data. Data including specified ON is transmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 63, payout control unit 17 designates operation mode switching as a table status inquiry request to main control board 16 according to data including test card insertion mode switching designation received from card unit 3. The data including the test card insertion mode switching designation ON is transmitted. The main control board 16 that has received such a stand status inquiry request temporarily evacuates variables related to the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function in a evacuation area provided in the RAM. Further, on the main control board 16, game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the change of the operation mode is performed by completing the change of the symbols and the big hit gaming state and performing the switching operation of the processing such as temporarily saving the data and clearing the game history data. It is.

  The main control board 16 waits until the switching of the operation mode is completed and inserts a test card of the operation mode switching result included in the operation response (not shown) as a table state inquiry response which is a response to the table state inquiry request. Data including the test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the mode transition ON is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives a table state inquiry response including such a test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, it responds to the operation instruction of the test card insertion mode switching ON according to the received data. As a certain operation response, the test mode insertion result transition ON of the operation mode switching result and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the test card insertion mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the test card insertion mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a communication sequence when shifting from the test card insertion mode to the operation mode will be described.

  When the return button 322 is operated on the card unit 3 in the test card insertion mode, the card unit 3 transmits data including an operation mode preparation designation ON for operation mode switching preparation designation as an operation instruction.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the operation mode preparation designation of the operation mode switching preparation designation is performed on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board according to the received data. Send data including ON.

  In the dispensing control unit 17, a test card insertion mode preparation designation for operation mode switching preparation designation is made as a stand status inquiry request in accordance with data including an operation mode preparation designation ON received from the card unit 3 with respect to the main control board 16. Send data including ON. The main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request.

  The main control board 16 is not shown until the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, but it is the same as the operation mode transition rejection of the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response. Data including operation mode transition rejection ON is transmitted. On the other hand, if the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not satisfied, data including the operation mode transition rejection OFF is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17, when a table state inquiry response including such an operation mode transition rejection OFF is received from the main control board 16, control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed according to the received data. The payout control unit 17 waits until all game balls are discharged from the game board surface, and the operation response that is a response to the operation instruction of the operation mode preparation designation ON is data including operation mode transition permission OFF Is transmitted to the card unit 3.

  When the operation mode switching preparation is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including an operation mode switching designation ON, which is designated as an operation mode switching, to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the operation mode switching specification ON for specifying the operation mode switching is performed on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board according to the received data. Send data containing

  In the payout control unit 17, the data including the operation mode switching designation ON of the operation mode switching designation as the stand status inquiry request according to the data including the operation mode switching designation received from the card unit 3 with respect to the main control board 16. Is transmitted to the main control board 16. In the main control board 16 that has received such a stand status inquiry request, the variables related to the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function temporarily retracted in the retreat area are returned to the original state, and the game Restore the machine status. Further, on the main control board 16, game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the change of the operation mode is performed by completing the change of the symbols and the big hit gaming state and performing the switching operation of the processing such as temporarily saving the data and clearing the game history data. It is.

  The main control board 16 waits until the switching of the operation mode is completed and inserts a test card of the operation mode switching result included in the operation response (not shown) as a table state inquiry response which is a response to the table state inquiry request. Data including the test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the mode transition ON is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives a base state inquiry response including such a test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, an operation that is a response to the operation instruction of the operation mode switching designation ON according to the received data. As a response, the operation mode switching result of the operation mode switching ON and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the operation mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the operation mode.

  Next, referring to FIG. 66, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 at the time of the addition request and the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 will be described.

  In the card unit 3, when a prepaid lending operation by the operation of the lending button 321 or a replay lending operation by the operation of the replay button 319 is performed, a game ball addition factor occurs, and a game ball owned by the player is added. Is done. In those cases, although not shown, the game ball number-related information including the number of balls requested for addition indicated in the operation instruction, the CU state (data displayed during prepaid lending display or replay lending display (in addition display) Is ON), and data such as a card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout controller 17 as an operation instruction. In this way, the card unit 3 transmits to the payout control unit 17 an operation instruction including data specifying the addition factor (during prepaid lending display and replay lending display).

  When the addition based on the prepaid lending operation or the replay lending operation is performed, an image during addition display as shown in FIG. 58 is displayed on the display 312 of the card unit 3.

  When a game ball addition factor occurs, the payout control unit 17 determines, based on the data received from the card unit 3, information related to the number of game balls including the total number of game balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification, CU state, etc. (Prepaid lending display or replay lending display data (additional display) is ON), and data such as card balance is used as a gaming machine information notification from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control unit 292. It is transmitted to the production control board. Thus, the game machine information notification including the data (prepaid lending display, replay lending display) specifying the addition factor is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board.

  When the display control board for the display device receives the gaming machine information notification, it determines whether the game ball addition factor corresponds to prepaid lending or replay lending based on the data specifying the addition factor. To do.

  Then, in the display effect control board, when the game ball addition factor is prepaid lending based on the determination result of the game ball addition factor, the display unit 54 shows (A1) to (A3) in FIG. Display control to display such prepaid rental animation is performed. The prepaid lending animation display changes from the display before prepaid lending as shown in (A1) of FIG. 69 to the prepaid lending display as shown in (A2) of FIG. 69, and then the prepaid as shown in (A3) of FIG. It becomes the display after lending. In the prepaid lending display, the card balance ("Balance" in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the holding ball ("Holding" in the figure). Made. Then, when such animation display is completed, a display after prepaid lending as shown in (A3) of FIG. 69 is obtained. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, the value of the card balance is changed to display that the number of possessed balls is increased, thereby specifying that the addition factor is prepaid lending.

  Also, in the display effect control board, when the game ball addition factor is replay lending based on the determination result of the game ball addition factor, the display 54 displays (B1) to (B3) in FIG. Display control for displaying replay rental animation as shown. The replay lending animation display changes from the display before replay lending as shown in (B1) of FIG. 69 to the display during replay lending as shown in (B2) of FIG. 69, and thereafter, as shown in (B3) of FIG. It will be displayed after replay lending. In the replay lending display, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is not changed, and an animation display is performed in which the number of possessed balls (“held ball” in the figure) gradually increases. When such animation display is completed, the display after replay lending as shown in (B3) of FIG. 69 is obtained. In this way, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the addition factor is replay lending by displaying that the number of possessed balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  When the image display during addition display on the card unit 3 ends, the data (in addition display) during prepaid lending display or replay lending display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, prepaid lending display or replay lending display data (additional display) included in the CU state is turned OFF in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board. In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when the prepaid lending display data or the replay lending display data is turned off in the gaming machine information notification, the addition animation display is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 at the time of the subtraction request and the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 will be described.

  In the card unit 3, if a ball split operation by a specified operation of holding ball sharing (mob ball split) or a wagon order operation by a wagon order specifying operation is performed, a game ball subtraction factor occurs, and the player owns The game balls of are subtracted. In those cases, the game ball number related information including the number of balls to be subtracted indicated in the operation instruction, the CU state (the data for displaying the split ball or displaying the wagon service (the subtraction display is ON)), and the card Data such as a balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout controller 17 as an operation instruction. In this manner, the card unit 3 transmits an operation instruction including data specifying the subtraction factor (during the splitting of the ball or displaying the wagon service) to the payout control unit 17.

  For example, when a wagon order operation is performed, an image during subtraction display such as an image indicating subtraction of the wagon service display is displayed on the display 312 of the card unit 3 (not shown). In addition, when the holding ball splitting operation is performed, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image during subtraction display such as an image indicating subtraction due to the splitting of the holding ball.

  When a game ball subtraction factor occurs, the payout control unit 17 based on the data received from the card unit 3, the game ball number related information including the total number of game balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification, the CU state (Data for splitting display or wagon service display (subtraction display) is ON) and data such as card balance are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board as a gaming machine information notification. As described above, the game machine information notification including the data specifying the subtraction factor (the holding ball split display or the wagon service display) is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board.

  In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when the gaming machine information notification is received, the game ball subtraction factor is based on the data that specifies the subtraction factor, and the ball splitting and wagon Determine whether it falls under the order.

  Then, on the display effect control board, based on the determination result of the game ball subtraction factor, when the game ball subtraction factor is the splitting of the ball, the indicator 54 gradually increases the value of the holding ball to the split ball. It is converted to a numerical value, and an animation display that the holding ball decreases is made. On the other hand, on the display effect control board, when the game ball subtraction factor is the wagon order based on the determination result of the game ball subtraction factor, the number of the holding balls is gradually increased to the wagon order on the display unit 54. It is converted to a numerical value, and an animation display that the holding ball decreases is made. Such a display in which the number of holding balls decreases based on the subtraction factor is called a subtraction animation display. Thus, the subtraction factor is specified in the subtraction animation display.

  When the image display during the subtraction display on the card unit 3 is completed, the data (in the subtraction display) during the ball split display or the wagon service display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board, the data on the ball split display or the wagon service display (addition display) included in the CU state is turned OFF. The display effect control board performs control to end the subtraction animation display when the data of the split-ball display or the wagon service display (subtraction display) is turned OFF in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292 in the game will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming state until the big hit occurs in the card unit 3, the display control for performing the animation display during the game which is the animation display displayed during the game is performed on the display 54 by the display effect control board. . When a big hit occurs, data including a big hit / medium ON similar to the big hit 1-4 ON included in the game information notification is transmitted from the game control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 as a table status inquiry response.

  When receiving the table state inquiry response including ON during such big hit, the payout control unit 17 receives the game ball number related information including the total number of game balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification, (Including 4)) and data including the jackpot end display OFF are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board as a gaming machine information notification. Thus, the game machine information notification including the data specifying the gaming state is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board.

  In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when the gaming machine information notification including ON during the big hit is received, the big hit which is an animation display displayed during the big hit game on the display 54 Display control for displaying medium animation is performed.

  Then, before the big hit game state is ended, the game control board 16 sends a payout control unit 17 to the payout control unit 17 as a base state inquiry response by turning ON the big hit end display ON which is the same as the big hit end display ON included in the game information notification. Contains data is sent.

  When receiving a table status inquiry response including ON during jackpot end display, the payout control unit 17 turns ON the jackpot end display data included in the gaming machine information notification (the data during the jackpot is ON. Continue).

  In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit middle ON and the big hit end display ON is received, the display unit 54 ends the big hit middle animation display, Display control is performed to display a jackpot end animation, which is an animation displayed when the jackpot ends.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, the game control board 16 transmits data including the big hit during OFF and the big hit end display OFF included in the game information notification to the payout control unit 17 as a table status inquiry response. .

  When receiving the table status inquiry response including such a big hit OFF and a big hit end display OFF, the payout control unit 17 turns off the big hit data and the big hit end display data included in the gaming machine information notification. To do.

  In the display effect control board provided with the display effect control unit 292, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit middle OFF and the big hit end display OFF is received, the display unit 54 ends the big hit end animation display, Display control is performed to display the animation during the game.

  Next, management of security related information in the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3 will be described.

  As security related information, for example, at least base abnormality detection setting value (base threshold value), abnormality detection setting value (TS threshold value) of the number of starts between special prizes (also referred to as TS), gaming machine test hit mode setting value, and subtraction ball abnormality Authentication operation designation information including setting information such as detection setting values is included. As described above, the security-related information includes predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Further, in the pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of jackpot occurrence, the probability per base figure at the time of low base, and the probability per base figure at the time of high base are variably set in a plurality of stages (for example, five stages). It is configured to be possible. The variable setting of these probabilities is manually input and set by the game hall manager in the upper server 801. The security-related information includes variable setting values of these probabilities.

  Instead of or in addition to the manual input setting by the host server 801, the probability variable setting may be performed by a remote operation device such as a remote controller. Furthermore, a plurality of gaming machines for which the probability setting is variably set can be specified collectively by operating the host server 801 so that the probability setting for the specified plurality of machines can be performed at a time. . You can specify multiple gaming machines by specifying each island where multiple gaming machines are installed, by specifying all the gaming machines of the same model together, Various methods such as a method of inputting and specifying the number of the card unit 3 installed adjacent to the gaming machine can be considered.

  Further, such security related information includes numerical data indicating the version number of information for the entire security related information. Data indicating the version number of such information is updated (for example, addition update of numerical data of the version number) when any of the security-related information as described above is changed. Note that the version number data of such information is not limited to the case where the security-related information is set as a whole, but the base abnormality detection setting value, the special award start number (TS) abnormality detection setting value, and the gaming machine trial hit mode setting value. And each data of the authentication operation designation information including the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value may be individually set and updated. Such security related information is stored in a security related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801 and the CU 3.

  In such security-related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial values” of various information described later), and a predetermined input operation such as a keyboard provided in the upper server 801 is performed. In the means, it is possible to change (update) the data by manually inputting the data by the manager of the game hall. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security-related information in the upper server 801, the security-related information is set to “initial value” data. When manually inputting security-related information in the host server 801, for example, each gaming machine in the game hall may be manually entered for each gaming machine, or a unified threshold value may be input and set for each model. Is possible. The host server 801 may acquire and use security related information as follows. If the model information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, if the model information and the setting information of the security related information are in one-to-one correspondence, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from an upper server than the upper server 801 to be set, and the downloaded model information is stored in the upper server 801 so that the model information is one-to-one corresponding to the security. The upper server 801 may select and store the related information, and the security related information may be used. Further, such security-related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at a preset timing (for example, a regular timing) without manual input. You may do it.

  The base abnormality detection set value is data for setting the presence / absence of base abnormality detection and its constant (threshold value) when the CU 3 detects a base abnormality state. The base abnormality detection setting value includes a low base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a low base state and a high base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a high base state.

  The low base time threshold value is a value indicated by B1 in FIG. 71B described later, the set value is in the range of 0 to 100%, and the initial value is 30%. Such a low base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and indicates “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the low base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set low base time threshold is performed, and when the low base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the low base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  The high base time threshold value is a value indicated by B2 in FIG. 71 (c) described later, the set value is in the range of 0 to 150%, and the initial value is 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the high base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set high base time threshold is performed, and when the high base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the high base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  The TS threshold is a value indicated by I in FIG. 71A described later, the set value is in the range of 0 to 100, and the initial value is 60. Such a TS threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0, and “detected” when set to a value other than 0. Thereby, when the TS threshold is other than 0, TS abnormality detection using the set TS threshold is performed, and when the TS threshold is 0, base abnormality detection using the TS threshold is not performed.

  The gaming machine trial hit mode setting value is data for setting the presence or absence of a trial hit mode such as adjustment of a gaming machine nail. In the gaming machine test hit mode setting value, “test hit mode present” or “no test hit mode” is indicated, and the initial value is “no test hit mode”.

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the presence / absence of an abnormal state detection and the constant (threshold value) of the subtraction ball number (the number of balls subtracted from the game ball number based on the firing detection signal) in CU3. It is. The abnormal state of the subtraction balls set here is detected based on the fact that there is a game ball winning in succession for the set number of balls, even though no game balls are fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the number of winning balls that have been continuously awarded and determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value has a setting value in the range of 0 to 99 balls and an initial value of 5 balls. Such a subtractive ball abnormality detection setting value indicates “not detected” when set to 0 balls, and indicates “detected” when set to other than 0 balls. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 balls, the subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0, the subtraction ball abnormality is detected. No detection is performed.

  Such security related information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 at a predetermined timing such as when communication between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is established (communication connection establishment) and when a setting value of the security related information is changed. . However, the version number of the security-related information is managed by both the upper server 801 and the CU3. When the CU 3 holds (stores) information of the same version number as that of the upper server 801 at the predetermined timing, the security related information is not transmitted.

  Next, a specific example of security related information processing for managing security related information in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing processing relating to security-related information in the upper server 801 and the CU3. In FIG. 70, (A) shows security-related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server 801 side, and (B) shows security-related information processing as processing executed on the CU3 side (main control unit 323). An information setting process is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 70 (A), in the upper server 801, when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is started (for example, it is necessary until the setting change of the security related information is completed by S713 described later). It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined short period after the start of communication establishment (such as a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin to a standard time) (S701). In this case, when the establishment state of the communication connection is started, the host server 801 is always in an operating state, the CU 3 is turned on before the start of business hours, and the power is turned off after the end of the business hours. This means the time when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts due to the input. When it is in the communication connection establishment start state, the process proceeds to S703 to be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the communication connection establishment start state, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting is changed in the online state (S702). When the security-related information setting is changed, for example, the base abnormality detection setting value (base threshold), the TS abnormality detection setting value (TS threshold), the big hit probability setting value, and the base figure probability at low base as described above The setting of any of the set value, probability setting per base figure at the time of high base, gaming machine trial hit mode setting value, and subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is manual (for example, manual operation by an operator input) This is the time when the security related information management process is executed after the change. Specifically, a predetermined change flag is set when the security-related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online, and when such a change flag is set in S702. It is determined that the security related information setting is being changed. Further, such a change flag is reset when it is confirmed that the setting of security related information has been changed in the CU 3 in response to the setting change of security related information in the upper server 801. Further, such a change flag is not set when the security-related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline. This is because, when the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, even if the setting of the security related information is changed in the upper server 801, the security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. This is because the security-related information after the change can be transmitted to the CU 3 by proceeding from S701 to the processing after S703 described later at the start of the established state of the communication connection when the power is turned on.

  In the upper server 801, the security related information setting is changed when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting the security related information is offline and when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting of the security related information is the online state. It is possible to execute in both cases. However, when the communication state between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is an online state, the security-related information after the setting change can be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. However, when the communication state is an offline state, The security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU3. In this embodiment, in S702, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting has been changed when the communication state with the CU 3 that is the setting target of the security-related information is an online state.

  When the setting of security related information is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, the change flag is set and held. After the next power-on of the CU 3, the S701 is bypassed and the security is performed by the S702. It is determined that the related information setting has been changed (if the change flag is set, it is determined that the security related information setting has been changed) and is the same as when the security related information is immediately changed in the online state. By performing the process, the security related information after the change may be transmitted to the CU 3 after the next power-on of the CU 3. Further, in the upper server 801, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is online. Further, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is offline.

  It should be noted that setting changes of various abnormality detection thresholds such as the above-described base abnormality detection setting value (base threshold value), abnormality detection setting value (TS threshold value) of the number of starts between special prizes (also referred to as TS) are performed manually as described above. In addition to the change by input, it may be changed by the following method. The host server 801 automatically sets data corresponding to the model of the P table 2 to which the CU 3 is connected based on the received gaming machine information from among a plurality of abnormality detection threshold values stored by itself. You may make it change a setting. Further, the upper server 801 is connected to the CU 3 by performing data communication with an external server (for example, a server provided at a gaming machine manufacturer) provided outside the game room based on the received gaming machine information. Setting data corresponding to the P machine model may be downloaded, and automatic setting change may be performed based on the setting data. This automatic setting change is, as described above, “setting” which is a standard setting among the five-stage probability variable settings (setting values 1 to 5 in FIGS. 71A, 71B, and 71C) by the upper server 801. By inputting and setting only the abnormality detection threshold value corresponding to “3”, threshold values corresponding to all the settings are calculated on the card unit side and stored in the respective tables. In other words, when the setting is changed in the upper server 801, whatever setting value the probability setting of the target pachinko machine 2 is, the upper server 801 has the standard probability “setting 3”. Setting only the data is enough.

  In the upper server, if the probability variable is set separately from the abnormality detection threshold (setting values 1 to 5 in FIGS. 71 (a), (b), and (c)), the setting values are transferred to the CU3 and the P stand 2. The set value is stored in the CU 3 and the P stand 2. The P unit 2 performs game control according to the stored setting value, and the CU 3 refers to the threshold values for abnormality detection corresponding to the stored setting value with reference to the various threshold value tables shown in FIGS. 71 (a), (b), and (c). The abnormality is determined using the read abnormality detection threshold.

  If it is determined in S702 that the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S702 that the security-related information setting is being changed, the process proceeds to S703. On the other hand, when it is determined in S702 that it is not time to change the setting of security-related information, that is, when it is offline or when the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the conditions of S702 are not met. Since it is not necessary to transmit data related to the setting change of the security related information to the CU 3, the process is terminated.

  In S703, it is determined whether or not a security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted (S703). Here, the security-related information version number request command is a command for requesting a response of the security-related information version number data stored in the CU 3. Specifically, in S703, it is determined whether the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet in the state where it is determined that the transmission timing of security-related information is determined in S701 or S702. Whether or not a security-related information version number request command has been transmitted is determined based on whether or not a later-described version number requested flag is set.

  When it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted, a process for transmitting the security-related information version number request command to the CU3 is performed (S704), and the process ends. When a security-related information version number request command is transmitted in S704, the above-described version number requested flag is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the security-related information version number response is received from the CU3 (S705). Here, the security-related information version number response is a response in which the CU3 returns the version number data of the security-related information stored in the CU3. Specifically, in S705, after it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has already been transmitted, it is determined whether it is the timing when the security-related information version number response from the CU3 is received. It is.

  If it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version number response has not been received, the process proceeds to S709 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version response has been received, the version specified by the received security-related information version response and the version stored and managed by the upper server 801 The number is compared (checked) to determine whether or not they match (S706). In the upper server 801, when the security-related information as described above is changed, data indicating the version number is updated. On the other hand, when the security-related information is received from the upper server 801, the CU 3 stores and manages the version number data included in the information as updated version number data.

  If it is determined in S706 that the version numbers match, the security-related information stored in CU3 is appropriate information, and it is not necessary to newly send security-related information to CU3. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S706 that the version numbers do not match, the security-related information stored in CU3 is inappropriate information, and the security-related information stored in CU3 is stored in the upper server 801. Since it is necessary to change (update) the latest information stored and held, a process for transmitting the latest security-related information to the CU 3 is performed (S707), and the process ends.

  As described above, when the security-related information version numbers do not match in S707, when the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the power of the CU3 is turned off. When security-related information is changed in the upper server 801, when a CU-side device is replaced, such as when the CU3 is turned off, or when the power of the CU3 is turned on, a communication failure occurs. Included when incorrect security-related information is stored in CU3, and when security-related information stored in CU3 changes to inappropriate information due to noise or the like when CU3 is powered on Yes. Here, when at least one of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is exchanged, the version number is different between the security related information stored in the CU 3 before the exchange and the security related information stored in the CU 3 after the exchange. There is a case. Therefore, even when such a device replacement is performed, the version numbers of the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 may not match, so the upper server 801 and the CU 3 store them. It is necessary to match the security related information.

  Next, timing of the response waiting time is started (S708). Here, the response waiting time is a time from when security-related information is transmitted until a response (security-related information setting response described later) received from the CU 3 is received in response to the transmission of the information. It is timed by software timer processing, and when a predetermined time elapses, it times out.

  For example, when the response waiting time is timed out, when the CU 3 is operating normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the upper server 801 is normal, the security related information setting response is received from the time when the security related information is transmitted. The standard time required until the time is set to a time that allows for a predetermined margin. That is, the predetermined time for the response waiting time to time out is set to a time that allows the CU 3 to operate normally and accepts that the communication state between the CU 3 and the upper server 801 is normal.

  In S709, it is determined whether the response waiting time has not timed out and is in a response waiting state as a state of waiting for reception of a security related information setting response from the CU 3 (S709). When not waiting for a response, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the response is waiting, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response from the CU 3 has been received (S710).

  When it is determined in S710 that a security related information setting response has been received, the response waiting state is terminated (S713), and the process is terminated. In this case, the response waiting time measurement ends in S713. On the other hand, when it is determined in S710 that the security-related information setting response has not been received, it is determined whether or not the response waiting time for which timing has been started in S708 has timed out after a predetermined time has elapsed (S711). . If it is determined in S711 that the timeout has not occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S711 that a timeout has occurred, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in information communication, and processing for blocking communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 is performed (S712), and a response is awaited in S713. Exit state. When S713 is executed, the aforementioned version number requested flag is reset.

  Note that the process of confirming the version number of the security-related information as described above and transmitting the security-related information to the CU 3 when there is a discrepancy is a regular timing in addition to the timing determined in S701 and S702 as described above. Such as a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, a predetermined period after the transition from the high base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. As described above, it may be executed at the timing when the gaming state is changed, or may be always executed.

  Further, the above-described S701 determines whether or not the communication connection to the network in the game arcade is established when the upper server 801 is turned on, and the process proceeds to S703 when the establishment is established. Thereafter, it may be determined whether or not the setting of security related information has been changed in S702. In that case, when the setting of the security related information is changed, the above-described change flag is set when the setting of the security related information is changed regardless of whether the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. When the change flag is set, the process may proceed from S702 to S703.

  When the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are always in the power-on state and are always on, the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 except when an abnormal state such as a power failure occurs. Is always established, and whenever the security-related information is changed and set in the upper server 801, the process always proceeds from S702 to S703.

  Next, referring to FIG. 70 (B), in CU3, in the security-related information setting process, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive a security-related information version number request command from the upper server 801 (S751). . If it is determined in S751 that the security related information version number request command is not received, the process proceeds to S754 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S751 that the security related information version number request command is received, the security related information version number data stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3 is confirmed (S752). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the version number data to the upper server 801 is performed (S753), and the process ends.

  In S754, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive the security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 in S707 described above (S754). If it is determined that the security related information is not received, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the security related information is being received, the received security related information is stored (updated) in the security related information storage unit in the CU 3 (S755). Thereby, the security-related information transmitted from the upper server 801 is stored and held in the CU3. An example of the storage is shown in FIGS. 71A, 71B, and 71C described later. Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to the upper server 801 as a response to the upper server 801 in response to storing the security related information (S755).

  In order to determine whether or not the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU3 is different, whether or not the version numbers match when the security-related information version data is transmitted from the CU3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value data of the security-related information may be received from the CU 3 to compare whether the setting value data matches. In this way, when the CU 3 is replaced, the CU 3 is connected to the P unit 2 of a different model, and the setting value data of the security related information is different, but the version number data of the security related information happens to happen. When the version data of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 matches, it is possible to prevent the abnormality detection from being performed with an incorrect setting value.

  71A to 71C are diagrams showing various tables stored in the main control unit 323 of the card unit (CU) 3. In addition, regarding the “setting value”, “big hit probability”, and “normal hit probability” in each table of FIGS. 71A to 71C, the ROM of the main control board 16 is in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 2. Is also stored in the table. The host server 801 stores various table data shown in FIGS. 71A to 71C in association with the model data of the gaming machine, and the first after the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 are connected. When the power is turned on, the model data of the pachinko machine 2 stored in the main control board 16 is transferred via the payout control unit 17, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323. The data is transmitted to the upper server 801, the table data corresponding to the transmitted model data is retrieved in the upper server 801, and the retrieved various table data is transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and transmitted. The main control unit 323 stores the various table data stored in the EEPROM. It should be noted that instead of or in addition to the “probability per map”, “the number of times or the opening time of the electric tulips constituting the start winning opening” may be stored in a table so as to be variably settable.

  Further, the various table data downloaded and stored from the upper server 801 to the card unit 3 may be limited to only the table data portion related to the set value and the threshold other than the big hit probability and the normal hit probability.

  “K” in FIG. 71 (a), “M1” in FIG. 71 (b), and “M2” in FIG. 71 (c) indicate specific numerical values predetermined in the design stage of the pachinko machine 2. . On the other hand, “I” in FIG. 71 (a), “B1” in FIG. 71 (b), and “B2” in FIG. 71 (c) are the security-related information input and set by the operation of the host server 801 described above. Various threshold values.

  “K” in FIG. 71 (a) indicates a jackpot occurrence probability at normal times other than probability change, and the jackpot occurrence probability at “setting 3” among the jackpot occurrence probabilities that can be variably set in five levels. This is “K”.

  “M1” in FIG. 71 (b) indicates the probability per base figure at the time of low base, and the probability per base figure at “setting 3” in the probability per base figure that can be variably set in five levels is “ M1 ".

  “M2” in FIG. 71 (c) shows the probability per base figure at the time of high base, and the probability per base figure at “setting 3” in the base figure probability that can be variably set in five levels is “ M2 ".

  “I” in FIG. 71A is a TS threshold value for determining whether or not the number of special prize start times (TS) as game data output from the pachinko machine 2 in operation is an abnormal value. The number of special prize starts (TS) in “Setting 3” is “I”.

  “B1” in FIG. 71 (b) is a base threshold value for determining whether or not the base value at the time of low base outputted as game information from the pachinko machine in operation is an abnormal value. The base threshold value in “Setting 3” is “B1”.

  “B2” in FIG. 71 (c) indicates a base threshold value for determining whether or not the base value at the time of low base output from an operating gaming machine is an abnormal value. The base threshold value for “setting 3” is “B2”.

  Numbers such as 0.8, 0.9, 1.1, and 1.2 shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are the respective setting states in five variable settings (setting 1 to setting 5). Is the coefficient.

  For the hit probability such as the probability of hitting, the probability per base figure at the time of low base, and the probability per base figure at the time of high base, setting 3 is a normal probability among the five settings of setting 1 to setting 5, and setting The coefficient value becomes smaller so that the probability becomes lower as 3 → setting 2 → setting 1, and the coefficient value becomes larger as the probability becomes higher as setting 3 → setting 4 → setting 5. Yes.

  The coefficient values of the base threshold values shown in FIGS. 71B and 71C also become smaller as setting 3 → setting 2 → setting 1 in the same manner as the coefficient value of the probability per ordinary figure, while setting 3 → setting 4 → The value increases as setting 5 is reached. This is based on the number of prize balls that were paid out when 100 pachinko balls were hit, so the base value would increase if the probability of hitting the map increased and the electric tulips were released frequently. This is because the base threshold value for determining the abnormality needs to be a large value.

  On the other hand, in the case of the TS threshold value shown in FIG. 71 (a), the coefficient of the TS threshold value becomes larger every time setting 3 → setting 2 → setting 1, while setting 3 → setting 4 → setting 5 The TS threshold coefficient is a large value. This is the number of times the TS starts between special prizes, that is, how many times the variable display device has fluctuated (started) from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot, so the jackpot probability is improved. This is because the TS value becomes a small value, and the jackpot probability is in an inversely proportional relationship with the TS value.

  The jackpot probability TS threshold value table shown in FIG. 71 (a) stores TS threshold values used for determining whether or not the number of starts between special prizes (TS) is an appropriate value in association with the jackpot probability. It is a table. As for the jackpot probability, five types of probability data of setting 1 to setting 5 are stored, and setting 3 is a standard jackpot probability K (for example, 1/300). Setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability of 0.8K (for example, 0.8 × 1/300). The big hit probability of setting 2 is 0.9K (for example, 0.9 × 1/300). The big hit probability of setting 4 is 1.1K (for example, 1.1 × 1/300). The big hit probability of setting 5 is 1.2K (for example, 1.2 × 1/300).

  When the big hit probability is 1/300, for example, TS is 300 as a logical value for calculation. In other words, the special figure (variable display device) fluctuates 300 times and the calculated value indicates that a big hit occurs once. When such a TS value is abnormally small (for example, 50 or less), there is a possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed on the pachinko machine 2. Such TS abnormality determination threshold values are stored in a table in association with various setting values.

  The jackpot probability TS threshold value table shown in FIG. 71 (a) is a table in a normal state that is not a high probability state (probability variation state). In addition to the jackpot probability TS threshold value table in this normal state, You may make it memorize | store separately the jackpot probability TS threshold value table in the state.

  The pachinko machine 2 stores five types of probability data per table so that the probability per base map can be variably set in five stages from setting 1 to setting 5 in the same manner as the probability of large hitting. FIG. 71B is a table that is referred to when the base is low, and FIG. 71C is a table that is referred to when the base is high. These tables of (b) and (c) store data of probability of each normal map and data of the base threshold value corresponding to the setting 1 to setting 5 of the probability per normal map. In setting 3 which is a standard setting in the base figure probability low base table of (b), the probability per base figure is M1, and the base threshold value for abnormality determination corresponding thereto is B1, and settings 1 and 2 are set. , Setting 4 and setting 5 are stored in a table with respective values designed based on the value of setting 3. Similarly, in the threshold table for the high probability per base figure in (c), the base per-probability in the standard setting 3 is M2 and the corresponding base threshold is B2, and the value of the setting 3 is used as a reference. Each value corresponding to setting 1, setting 2, setting 4, and setting 5 designed as is stored in a table.

  Note that the various table data shown in FIGS. 71A to 71C are merely examples, and are not limited to such specific values.

  The variable setting of the jackpot probability and the probability per base figure is configured so that the manager of the game hall can remotely set the host server 801 as described above. The game hall administrator operates the keyboard of the host server 801 to identify the pachinko machine 2 to be variably set, and the probability of big hit, probability of base figure at low base, or probability of base figure at high base Are selected and designated (setting 1 to setting 5). Then, the selected and designated data is transmitted to the pachinko machine 2 to be set via the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3. In the pachinko machine 2 that has received the data transmitted from the host server, the data is taken into the main control board 16 via the P-unit communication control section 81 and the payout control section 17, and the RAM or EEPROM of the main control board 16 is read. The data is stored in The card unit 3 also stores data (set values) transmitted from the host server in the RAM or EEPROM of the main control unit 323.

  In the main control board 16, when performing the game progress control, the probability corresponding to the stored set value is the probability of generating big hits, low bases per base figure, high bases per base Various controls such as generation control are performed. Game information (launched number information, acquired number information, number of symbols determined, etc.) generated by the main control board 16 performing game control based on a reference value (probability of jackpot or probability per base figure) corresponding to such a set value ) Is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the main control unit 323 via the payout control unit 17, the P-unit communication control unit 81, and the CU communication control unit 80. The main control unit 323 stores the transmitted game information (the value of TS, the base value at the time of low base and the base value at the time of high base) in various tables shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to (c). Compared with the corresponding base value, it is determined whether or not the value is abnormal.

  For example, when the probability per base figure at the time of low base is variably set to “setting 2”, it is stored in association with “setting 2” in the threshold value table for base probability per base figure of FIG. 71 (b). The base threshold value 0.9B1 is compared with the base value transmitted from the pachinko machine 2, and if the base threshold value is 0.9B1 or more, an abnormality is determined. In the same manner, the abnormality determination of TS and the abnormality determination of base value at the time of high base are performed using the big hit probability TS threshold value table and the base probability probability base threshold value table.

  Regarding the TS threshold, the base threshold at the time of low base, and the base threshold at the time of high base, the TS threshold I and the base threshold B1 at the time of low base in “Setting 3” shown in FIGS. , And the base threshold value B2 at the time of high base is input and set from the upper server 801, and the input threshold value is downloaded from the upper server 801 and stored. Specifically, the administrator of the game hall operates the keyboard of the host server 801 and the like to specify a pachinko machine that is subject to threshold variable setting, and then various thresholds I, B1, and B2 corresponding to setting 3 Enter the value of. Then, the values of the various threshold values I, B1, and B2 set as input are transmitted from the upper server to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3. The main control unit 323 substitutes the received I value into “I” in the TS threshold value column of the jackpot probability TS threshold value table and stores it in the table, and receives the received B1 value as a base table probability table based threshold value table. The value is stored in a table by substituting it into “B1” in the base threshold value column, and the table is stored by substituting the received B2 value into “B2” in the base threshold value column in the base threshold value table in the high probability per base figure table. . As a result, specific numerical values are stored in a table in the TS threshold value column, the base threshold value column at the time of low base, and the base threshold value column at the time of high base.

  For example, when “100” is input and set as the TS threshold I from the upper server 801 and transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 sets I = 100 in FIG. ) In the storage area of “TS threshold” in the jackpot probability TS threshold table, TS threshold is “300” in setting 3, TS threshold is 1.1 × 100 = “110” in setting 2, and TS threshold is in setting 1 Is 1.2 × 100 = “120”, TS threshold is 0.9 × 100 = “90” in setting 4, TS threshold is 0.8 × 100 = “80” in setting 5, and each TS threshold is stored in a table. To do. Thereby, data storage of the big hit probability threshold value table is completed.

  In this state, when “setting 4” is input and set from the host server 801 as the jackpot probability and is transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 stores “setting 4”. At the same time, “setting 4” is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 2, and the main control board 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 2 stores it and performs game control with a big hit probability according to “setting 4”. Then, the card unit 3 determines whether or not an ST abnormality has occurred based on the above “90” that is the TS threshold value stored corresponding to “setting 4”.

  In this way, the administrator of the game arcade simply inputs and sets various threshold values corresponding to “Setting 3”, and the values of the various threshold values corresponding to Setting 1, Setting 2, Setting 4, and Setting 5 are changed to the card unit 3. On the side, the variable setting is automatically made, and the variable setting input operation becomes easy. In addition, you may comprise so that the various threshold values according to each setting of the setting 1, the setting 2, the setting 3, the setting 4, and the setting 5 may be input and set by manual operation one by one.

  Next, a base monitoring process executed by the CU 3 (main control unit 323) in order to monitor the base based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the base monitoring process executed by the CU3. The base monitoring process is executed in a state other than the big hit gaming state.

  In the base monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 has been received (S801). When it is determined that the game ball firing number information has been received, based on the received game ball firing number information, the number of fires counted by the firing information number counter is updated in CU3 (S802), and S803. Proceed to On the other hand, when it is determined that the shipment number information has not been received, the process proceeds to S803 without adding and updating the data of the number of shots. Thereby, in CU3, the number of discharges can be counted and managed.

  In S803, it is determined whether or not the game ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 is received (S803). When it is determined that the game ball acquisition number information has been received, the acquisition number data counted by the acquisition number counter in the CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball acquisition number information (S804). move on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball acquired number information is not received, the process proceeds to S805 without adding and updating the acquired number data. Thereby, in CU3, the acquisition number can be counted and managed.

  In S805, it is determined whether or not a predetermined base calculation timing is reached (S805). In CU3, for example, in order to perform a process of calculating a base every time a predetermined time such as one minute elapses, the elapsed time is measured using a predetermined software timer after the card is inserted into CU3, and the timer is set to a predetermined time. Every time a time (for example, 1 minute) is timed out and timed out, it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come. The “predetermined base calculation timing” in S805 may determine whether or not the calculation timing has come after the occurrence of a common map multiple times. If the base calculation timing is determined from the stage of the first map after turning on the power, if the first hit occurs with an extremely small number of launch balls, an abnormality is determined immediately. By performing the control of S801 to S804 until the occurrence of multiple times of normal maps, the calculation of the base in S806 and subsequent steps and the abnormality determination of the calculated values are performed, so that It is possible to calculate an average base over a range of times, and avoid the above-described inconvenience of erroneously determining an abnormality at the time of the first hit.

  If it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is not reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is reached, a process of calculating the base is performed based on the number of fires counted in S802 and the number of acquisitions counted in S804 (S806). Specifically, in S806, the base is calculated by performing an arithmetic operation using an arithmetic expression such as “acquired number / launched number × 100” (%).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (S807). In S807, for example, the current gaming state is in the high base state based on the information indicating whether or not the high base is specified by the data of the “gaming table state 2” transmitted from the P table 2 and received. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in S807 that the base state is not the high base state, that is, the base state is the low base state, the low base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value in the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3. It is set (S808), and the process proceeds to S810. Specifically, in S808, the base threshold value corresponding to the probability per base figure is read out as a base abnormality detection set value by referring to the base table probability threshold value table (see FIG. 71 (b)). While the setting process is performed, when it is determined in S807 that the state is the high base state, the high base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value in the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3. It is set (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. Specifically, in S809, the base threshold value corresponding to the probability per base map is read out as a base abnormality detection set value by referring to the base threshold table for high probability per base map (see FIG. 71 (c)). Processing for setting is performed.

  In S810, it is determined whether or not the base value calculated in S806 is greater than or equal to the base abnormality detection set value set in accordance with whether or not the high base state is set in S808 or S809. If it is determined in S810 that it is not equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection set value, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the base abnormality detection set value is equal to or greater than S810, an error notification for notifying the occurrence of the base abnormality for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base is performed on the display 312 (S811). Then, the host server 801 is notified of the error information specifying the abnormal state (S812), and the process ends. As error notification, instead of or in addition to that executed by the indicator 312, the point of an abnormality notification lamp provided on the CU 3 (or blinking), or abnormality notification by sound from a speaker May be performed. Such display, light emission, and sound notification may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided in the host server 801, or a display (for example, a display) provided in the P stand 2. It is also possible to use a lamp and a speaker.

  The error information notified in S812 includes occurrence date and time, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), BB serial number, main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout control chip. Information (payout chip ID) is included. Here, the error code is information indicating a large classification error code when the error type is largely classified according to a predetermined classification standard. The error information is information indicating a small classification error code when the large classification error code is classified in detail according to a predetermined classification standard.

  Thus, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the P unit 2 is inappropriate, error information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate is received from the CU 3. Since the data is transmitted to the upper server 801, the upper server 801 can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  As described above, the base calculation timing in S805 and the abnormality detection timing in S810 are low for a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, instead of the periodic timing as described above. It may be set to a timing when the gaming state changes, such as a predetermined period after the transition to the base state and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered, and the base monitoring process is executed. The base may be calculated at all times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, control of TS monitoring processing executed by the CU will be described. In S819, it is determined whether or not there is a start. This is to determine whether or not the special figure (variable display device) is variably started, and is determined by the data of the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 described above. Note that this special figure (variable display device) is not variably displayed during the big hit, and is variably started when there is a holding memory based on the start winning prize other than the big win. If NO is determined in step S819, the control proceeds to step S821. If YES is determined in step S819, the control proceeds to step S820, in which the start count is added, updated, and stored. Next, in S821, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence information has been received from the pachinko machine 2, and if not received, this TS monitoring process ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence information is received from the pachinko machine 2, the control proceeds to S822, and the TS threshold value corresponding to the jackpot probability set value is read with reference to the jackpot probability threshold value table (see FIG. 71 (a)). Thus, processing for setting as a TS abnormality detection set value is performed.

  Next, in S823, it is determined whether or not the average start count (start count / number of occurrences of big hits up to the present) calculated using the start count stored in S820 is less than the TS abnormality detection set value. . If the normal operation is performed normally, NO is determined in S823 and the control proceeds to S836. However, if any irregularities are made in the pachinko machine 2 and the number of start times is abnormally small, YES is determined in S823. The control proceeds to S824, and the display 312 performs error notification for notifying the occurrence of a TS abnormality for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the TS, and specifies the abnormal state to the upper server 801. The notified error information is notified (S835), and the process ends. Note that the abnormality determination in S823 may not be executed until a big hit occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the power is turned on. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent abnormality determination when the first big hit happens by a small number of start times, and it is possible to determine only abnormality that is highly likely to be fraudulent.

  The average number of starts determined in S823 is calculated by dividing the total number of starts up to the current time by the total number of jackpots generated up to the present time. It is also possible to count the number of times and store the respective values, extract the number of jackpot start times for a plurality of times from the current time, and calculate the average of the number of jackpot start times for the plurality of times.

  As error notification, instead of or in addition to that executed by the indicator 312, the point of an abnormality notification lamp provided on the CU 3 (or blinking), or abnormality notification by sound from a speaker May be performed. Such display, light emission, and sound notification may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided in the host server 801, or a display (for example, a display) provided in the P stand 2. It is also possible to use a lamp and a speaker. In addition, the error notification in S811 and S824 described above is not performed where the player such as the card unit 3 or the pachinko machine 2 can confirm, and the error notification is made in a place that can be recognized only by the manager or the staff of the game hall. May be performed. This error notification is not an error notification due to the fact that fraud has been surely performed, but is an error notification of the determination result that there is a possibility that an abnormality due to fraud has occurred. If error notification is given, there will be an inconvenience that a player who has not made any fraud will treat it as if it is fraudulent, and in order to prevent such inconvenience, an error notification will be issued where the player cannot confirm. It is good to do.

  Also, the game hall staff may be able to confirm the occurrence history of the abnormality and the variably set value using the display 312 or the like. Specifically, for example, the main control unit 323 is controlled to display the abnormality occurrence history and the set value on the display 312 by a touch operation of the display 312 including a touch panel in the state where the above-described “maintenance mode” is switched. To do. The set value may be displayed on the display device 54 (or the display device 510 described later) on the gaming machine side in the maintenance mode. Furthermore, if it can be judged on the gaming machine side such as a base abnormality, it may be displayed on the gaming machine side display 54 (or display 510 described later). As a specific example of the “abnormality occurrence history”, for each abnormality that has occurred, the occurrence time, the type of abnormality (for example, base abnormality, TS abnormality, etc.), and the values of game data determined to be abnormal are listed. To display. This list may be selected and displayed as a list of the day, a list for the past week, a list for the past month, or the like according to the operation. Further, the display of the “value of game data determined to be abnormal” displays the past actual numerical value itself (the abnormal TS actual measurement value and the base actual measurement value itself).

  Further, as another display method, transition of past actual numerical values themselves (all TS actual measurement values including both normal and abnormal values and base actual measurement numerical values themselves), for example, a line graph (the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is The threshold value for abnormality determination may be plotted at a corresponding position on the vertical axis, and a broken line or the like may be displayed laterally therefrom. In this way, it is possible to determine that the game data portion that exceeds (or falls below) the broken line that is the abnormality determination threshold is abnormal by looking at this graph.

  The CU3 (main control unit 323) also executes a subtraction ball monitoring process for monitoring the subtraction balls based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU3. In the subtraction ball monitoring process, the payout control unit 17 recognizes whether or not there is a fired ball based on the game ball fired number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 and determines that there is no fired ball. The winning ball detected based on the winning information transmitted from (start opening 1 to 3, large winning opening 1 and 2, winning winning 1 to 4) is recognized, and the winning ball is stored (held) in CU3. When it is determined that the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the security-related information is continuously won or more (for example, five balls), it is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtracting balls has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a subtraction ball abnormality has occurred, an error notification for specifying the abnormal state and an error notification are performed as in the case of the base abnormality described above.

  In addition to the base abnormality and the subtraction ball abnormality described above, the following security-related information is stored in each of the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3, and the base abnormality and the subtraction ball abnormality as described above are stored. Similarly, setting value transmission processing and error monitoring processing may be executed.

  Judgment that determines that the number of possessed balls is abnormal when the difference between the number of retained balls stored in the CU 3 and the number of held balls stored in the P stand 2 exceeds a set value (for example, one ball). A numerical abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  In the state where there is no winning count based on the information on the number of game balls acquired transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3, the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3 (starting ports 1-3, large winning ports 1, 2) An addition ball abnormality that is determined to be an abnormality of the addition ball when a winning ball is detected based on the winning openings 1 to 4) may be used as the security-related information.

  Based on the game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3, a negative ball that is determined to be abnormal when the number of held balls stored in the CU 3 becomes a negative value. An abnormality may be used as the security related information.

  Based on the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, and winning ports 1 to 4), the number of winning balls per unit time has exceeded the set value. An abnormality in the number of winning balls per unit time that is sometimes determined to be abnormal may be managed as the security related information. In that case, as setting values, a first setting value for a big hit gaming state (for example, 50 balls / minute) and a second setting value for a non-hit gaming state (for example, 10 balls / minute) It can be managed separately.

  A difference in the number of balls that is determined to be abnormal when the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of balls to be collected transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 is equal to or greater than a set value may be used as the security-related information. .

  As security related information, in addition to the above-described authentication operation designation information, authentication control information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3, and such authentication control information is stored in both the upper server 801 and the CU3. You may make it manage. Here, the authentication control information is predetermined setting information including threshold data related to the various types of authentication described above, and whether or not the setting information is transmitted at the same timing as the authentication operation specifying information described above. As in the authentication operation designation information described above, the information may be transmitted only when the version number stored in the upper server 801 and the version number stored in the CU 3 do not match.

  Thus, as the security-related information, predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Then, such setting information data is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and stored in both the upper server 801 and the CU3. In the CU3, the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation. Is used to determine whether or not is appropriate.

  As the base abnormality detection setting value, a low base time threshold value used in the low base state and a high base time threshold value used in the high base state are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a big hit time threshold value used in the big hit game state is provided and transmitted from the upper server 801 in the security related information, and used for abnormality detection in the same manner as the low base time threshold value and the high base time threshold value. Also good. In this case, the base may be calculated even during the big hit gaming state, and the calculated base may be compared with the big hit threshold value to detect the base abnormality during the big hit.

  Further, based on the C-ID (card ID) inserted into the CU 3 and the game information corresponding to the C-ID, a player having a high occurrence frequency of an abnormal state such as a base abnormality is identified, and the player Security-related information so that anomaly can be determined using special security-related information in which data such as threshold values that are different from those of other players (for example, threshold values that are easier to detect abnormal states) are set. By setting the data, the setting contents of the security related information may be varied according to the occurrence frequency of the abnormal state.

  As described above, the setting information related to the security related information such as the base abnormality detection setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and stored in the CU3. In the CU3, the base abnormality and the like are set based on the setting information. By monitoring the abnormality related to the security related information, the processing load of the higher level server 801 can be reduced compared to the case where the higher level server 801 monitors the abnormality related to the security related information. Furthermore, since the higher-level server 801 and the CU 3 share security-related information monitoring processing, it is possible to perform abnormality determination using a more detailed threshold. Even in such a case, the host server 801 only manages the setting value, and the CU 3 only makes an abnormality determination based on the transmitted setting value, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing burden on both.

  Further, as described above, when the version number of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the version number of the security related information stored in the CU 3 are compared (verified), the version numbers do not match. Since the security related information is transmitted, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game is continued while the stored security related information is set incorrectly. In addition, although the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the security related information stored in the CU 3 match, there is no need to update the security related information stored in the CU 3. It is possible to prevent unnecessary communication of security related information. Note that security-related information must be sent without comparing the version number at a predetermined timing, such as when the communication connection establishment start state as described above and at the time of changing the setting value of security-related information are made. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the upper management server 801 is taken as an example of a game management apparatus that manages setting information such as threshold values of security related information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the hall management computer 1 may manage setting information such as a threshold value of security related information.

  In addition, in the case of inputting threshold data of security related information in the upper server 801, instead of setting the data directly by inputting, for example, 10%, 20%, 30%. The management is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, setting 1, setting 2,...), And thresholds are associated with the setting stages (for example, setting 1: 10%, setting 2: 20%, setting 3:30). %)), For example, by inputting and setting setting stage information such as setting 1, setting 2, setting 3,..., Threshold value data is indirectly specified and stored in the upper server 801. May be.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 74, the slot machine 2S is provided with a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left edge thereof as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front door 2bS opposite to the swing center. The engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS facing the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. When the opened front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS, the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS get over the engaging receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (not shown) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2bS. When the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engagements against the spring biasing force. The protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector (not shown) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and it is detected that the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS and is locked. The

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, main data among various data stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  FIG. 75 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data mounted in the S-side payout control unit (not shown). First, when the power supply is started up in a state where the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, The main chip ID is transmitted from a main control board (not shown), the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit itself is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  And when communication interruption occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. On the S side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of communication interruption. Therefore, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction has been transmitted or an operation instruction has been received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection, the SQN stored in the backup until communication reconnection is transmitted last. Either the last received or last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 75, a total of four types of counters including an addition counter, a subtraction counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter are provided in the current score-related information storage area of the RAM. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added is transmitted from the main control board to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The payout control unit adds and updates the point counter by the addition of the addition counter when adding and updating the addition counter, and subtracts the point counter by the addition of the subtraction counter when adding and updating the subtraction counter Update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Furthermore, the S units back up the counter values of the three types of the four types of counters excluding the point number counter in the storage area of “previous point related information” every time data is transmitted.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Become.

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It may be a command indicating.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined number of stored medals from a storage area for storing stored medals in response to an input requesting the use of stored medals (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 provided on the CU). To do. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service, in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like, is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is received from the CU side. S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing the storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as in FIG. 3 is performed, and instead of the P units, the S units are used. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 77 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, in which the card unit 3 is incorporated in the pachinko machine 2.

  The card unit 3 is incorporated at a position below the game area 27 as indicated by a broken line. A player can insert a card from a card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and a player can insert a bill from a bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the indicator 54 of the gaming machine so that the player can visually recognize it. In the figure, 320 is an IR light receiving unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a call button.

  The modified example of the card unit shown in FIG. 77 shows that it is incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIG. The slot machine 2S shown in 76 may be used.

  (2) Next, a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 3, 17, and 76 will be described. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. 3. Here, differences from FIGS. 3, 17, and 76 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 3, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the P base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 instead of the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the memory in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P table 2 by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal deletes the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the action of the clear processing unit, and the P machine game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 78, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the P table 2 that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P unit 2, while when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 78, and is a diagram showing storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as that in FIG. 77 is performed, and the difference is that the S units are used instead of the P units. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted. FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 also show the same player's game history by confirming the identity of the player only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card, as in FIGS. Store it in the data and take over the game history and aggregate it.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing control of processing at the time of insertion in the modification shown in FIGS. 78 and 79. The control in FIG. 80 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 17, and the same control steps are denoted by the same step numbers. Differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 80, solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and double-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 80, each step of S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21 is executed by the CU, and P22 is executed by S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S20, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S21, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the P units. Specifically, in the case of a determination result that matches, the same command is transmitted to the P units in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In the P machines, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S22, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S12).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 80, the control in S14 shown in FIG. 17 is not executed.

  In this modified example, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is used as a gaming machine (P machine 2 or S May be transmitted to the stand 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S) that has received the game history data a stores the received game history data a in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) and takes over the game history data a. To add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is unnecessary in the gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S).

(3) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 16) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
An abnormality notification control means (CPU of the main control board 16, I / O port) for performing control for notifying the abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Connected to the gaming device so as to be communicable (connected by a connector),
Including an abnormality determination means (authentication sequence of FIG. 7) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
When the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means, an abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred is output to the gaming device (an abnormality in the main control board 16 is detected). The payout control unit 17 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit),
The gaming device performs control for notifying an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, when the error occurs during the control of the gaming machine, the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function for notifying the abnormality is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use the information as it is in the P unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) The authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 6 to 14 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, but the control of the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. The payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 may be used. Alternatively, the payout control unit of the slot machine 2S and the S-unit communication control unit 82 may be used. You may perform in other installed gaming machines (a card issuing device, a clearing device, a hall management device, a prize exchange device, etc.).

  Further, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 14 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a gaming machine computer, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 14 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 9 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, CU SID) ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (7) In the above embodiment, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the display 54 on the P platform side. Yes. When the number of game balls is displayed by a display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (8) In FIG. 26, the P-side is provided with a 10-second wait time for the floating ball processing waiting time. Instead, on the P-side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the out ball It is also possible to determine that the number of winning balls = 0 or the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch = 0 to determine that the processing of the floating balls has ended. Good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, in the P units that have received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown) is stopped to stop hitting the ball, and the variable display device that is changing is stopped or In the above example, the variable display device is not stopped until the change based on the start winning memory, but the change of the variable display device may be stopped instead.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described based on FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), the CU does not wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the side alone, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a command is sent from the CU to the P machine and the P machine responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is sent from the P machine to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the P units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82 transmits to CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is returned to the P unit communication control unit 81 and S unit. The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control unit 17.

  In this case, the payout control unit 17 executes command retransmission (not shown). That is, the payout control unit 17 sends a command to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit when the response cannot be received from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 for 1 second after the command transmission. Retransmit to 82. Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 also executes the transmission of the communication status request and the retry of the communication status confirmation shown in FIGS. That is, the payout control unit 17 transmits an operation instruction to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 and then transmits a communication state request, and returns from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82. The communication status is confirmed based on the received communication status response. When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the P platform at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms). Instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the P units to the other.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P platform to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the P units returning a rejection ON operation response, an operation response including addition / subtraction ball numbers and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the side, it is possible to determine whether the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P base is detected, the ball hitting is stopped on the P base side and the play is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the game can be continued without stopping hitting on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P platform determines that the communication is disconnected by a predetermined process. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. As described above, the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are connected by a signal line. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from the card unit 3 is input to the pachinko machine 2 side. A connection detection signal line is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are composed of the same cable, and the cable is disconnected or the connector is disconnected, and further the power supply of the card unit 3 is disconnected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when this occurs, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connector, or the power supply of the card unit 3 has been cut off due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 15, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed not to reject the correction request. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot be corrected such as a game ball has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and if it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, the CU determines in advance when it is determined that a game machine (for example, P machines) cannot add game balls or the like even after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(17) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0. Thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (18) The P platform does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it may be configured to transmit the additional ball number to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count, are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that increments according to an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts due to a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(21) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. In order to cancel the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When the command is received, whether the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or if the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the score storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable by radio instead of wired connection.
(24) By providing the function of the payout control unit 17 in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 may not be provided in the pachinko machine 2.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control to stop driving of the ball hitting motor (not shown) when the game ball counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control unit 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor (not shown) when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, an effect unit (display effect control unit 292) is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are made by the display unit 54. A non-pachinko machine 2 may be used. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (27) Instead of manually clearing RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 3, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output when the game hall business start time comes. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (28) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process of the number of game history balls such as the number of symbol determinations 1, 2, the start ports 1-3, the big winning ports 1, 2, the winning ports 1-4, etc., Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P machines, the game history data is basically based on the game history data held by the P machine regardless of the match or mismatch. The CU side game history data may be controlled to be updated. However, the data of the total number of game balls, the total of added balls, and the total of subtracted balls can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (29) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the test hit mode is performed by inserting a test card into the CU. Instead of or in addition to this, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game room Control may be performed so as to shift to the test hit mode by a remote control operation by a store clerk. Such a transition to the trial hit mode by the remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hit mode by the remote control while waiting for a customer (even during the probability change). And as a test hit mode, you may provide two types, the 1st test hit mode used as a non-business event in a game hall, and the 2nd test hit mode for confirmation after nail adjustment.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more game balls (or points) in the test hit mode, a game ball addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to the P units (or S units). The game balls can be added by adding the game balls (or adding the number of points), but without sending the game ball addition command (or the number of points added command) from the CU side, You may control so that a game can be continued even if a game ball (or number of points) runs out.

(30) The above-mentioned C-ID is composed of fixed code data that does not change. Instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and the C-ID is encrypted with the T in the card E _T (C-ID), and the E _T (C-ID) And T are output as a pair. The CU decodes the E _T (C-ID) with T and extracts the C-ID by D _T (E _T (C-ID)).

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, a player is specified based on the C-ID and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprint or vein of the player is provided on the CU or P base, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored with the return of the card. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In this case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 3 and the like, the C-ID matching determination is performed on the P platform side. However, the matching determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the P platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the P unit 2. In the P base 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is deleted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the P unit 2 Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but the backup game history data for taking over, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the P unit 2 is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P unit 2 as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the P units is not necessary.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, 50, 51, 54, 55, 58, and 59, the C-ID identity determination is performed by the CU. Although what is performed on the P side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P platform side. In other words, a gaming machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A game machine in which points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A gaming machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control unit that performs control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination unit from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission / reception. When a different C-ID is transmitted from the P platform to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined that there is an error, and control is performed so that the addition ball count and the subtraction ball count are not updated on the CU side. . When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may be temporarily distorted due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In this case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that there is an error and transmits the error. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the motion response. As a result, when a C-ID that is not distorted by noise is transmitted from the P base side in the next command and response transmission / reception, the operation response is determined even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The number of game balls (total number of game balls) included in the CU and the total number of game balls stored in the CU are inconsistent. In the above embodiment, in such a case, the CU stores A command for correcting the number of game balls to be transmitted is transmitted to the P units, and the number of game balls stored in the P units is rewritten to the number of stored balls on the CU side. As a result, the number of game balls of P units is rewritten to the previous number of old game balls updated based on the previous response in which the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct number of game balls is incorrect. There are cases where the number of balls is rewritten.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so as to determine that there is an abnormality only when the C-ID in the response subsequently goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods are conceivable as specific methods for realizing this.

  First, as a first method, when the C-ID included in the first response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the next command is sent directly to the P units without adding and updating SQN. Send. Then, in the P platform, as described based on FIG. 30, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the previous transmission data is added to the additional balls and the added additional balls and the like are added. Control to transmit to the CU as the next response is performed. In the CU, if the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, the CU determines that the C-ID is appropriate, and adds the previous transmission data to the added number of balls. Based on the update control of the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of game balls. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the C-ID is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice in succession. Instead of updating the number of game balls based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the response, a predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  As a second method, the CU side adds and updates separately during C-ID mismatch, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is used as the total number of game balls. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device
A score storage means for storing the score;
Game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Gaming machine side identification information storage means for storing identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the main score storage means based on the update information;
Consistency to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means are matched. A determination means;
An abnormality determination unit that performs an abnormality determination when it is determined that the alignment result is not continuously matched a predetermined number of times.
The point update means includes:
When abnormality determination is performed by the abnormality determination means, the score is updated corresponding to the total amount of change of the score in the gaming machine during the period determined to be inconsistent by the alignment determination means. Don't do it,
When it is determined that the consistency determination unit is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination unit is performed, the alignment determination unit determines that there is a mismatch. The points are updated based on the total amount of change of the points in the gaming machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, even if identification information that is temporarily distorted due to noise or the like is received despite proper identification information being transmitted, it is erroneously determined as abnormal in the gaming device, and updated information is obtained. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the trial hit mode when the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312 is touch-operated. Instead of or in addition, it may be controlled to re-total the game history data in the trial hit mode by detecting the opening of the glass door.

  (37) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine type game machine is a player-owned valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or the like specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card). A gaming machine that has a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables the number of stored balls) to be used for gaming, and that launches gaming media into the gaming area ( Pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls specified by recording information received on a recording medium (card). Including a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. The game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed, and the derived display result is a predetermined specific display result. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can sometimes win a prize.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine is capable of playing with points and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the player's own gaming value. (S-unit communication control unit 82) and a variable display device whose display state can be changed, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is When one game is completed by the derivation display, a winning can be generated when the derivation-displayed display result becomes a specific display result determined in advance, and points are added according to the occurrence of the winning. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S).

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIG. 2 and FIG. 75, the number of game balls and points stored by the CU and the number of game balls and points sent from the gaming machine are determined. The CU determines whether or not they match, and if they do not match, a correction command is sent to match the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side with the number of game balls and points on the CU side. C-ID matching / mismatching may be further added as a determination criterion. For example, even if the number of game balls or points stored by the CU does not match the number of game balls or points sent from the gaming machine, it will not send a correction command by itself, and from the gaming machine When the CU determines that the transmitted C-ID does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes C-ID data to be distorted occurs, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side to correct values. Can do.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID transmitted from the gaming machine matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. In this way, if there is an abnormality that the number of game balls or points on the gaming machine side is out of order when the player is not changing, a correction command is sent to the number of game balls or points on the game machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (39) In the embodiment described above, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 deletes the oldest stored data from the stored data for 10 days in the P game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the old day one by one. As a condition for executing the shift control of this P game history data, it is a time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the P game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition to this, the LSI 799 and the main control board of the gaming machine 16, 116 may be executed between the payout control units 17, 117 and the P communication control units 81, 82.

  (41) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead or in addition to the CU 3, A process of clearing the game history data described above may be performed by providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when a clerk at the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR light receiving unit 320 of the CU3, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (42) In the above-described embodiment, a slot machine that does not require any physical game medium such as a medal in the game has been described as an example of a point-slot type slot machine. When such a slot machine is employed, a game medium is not required, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a game medium transport path or a game medium reservoir in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be reduced in size or cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine that adopts a scoring system and updates the scoring in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or game ball in a predetermined direction is adopted. It is also possible to do.

  For example, a circulation path is provided for enclosing a large number of game media in the slot machine and circulating the enclosed game media in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / input part which can discharge | emit / input game media as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  When the point addition condition is satisfied, the slot machine adds the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be added from the plurality of game media in the circulation path to the second from the predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to a location, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored number of points.

  Further, when the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the slot machine, from among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, the number of game media corresponding to the number of score points to be subtracted from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored score is subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored number of points.

  Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first location to the second location as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  Also, the game medium moving between the first location and the second location can be seen through in order for the player to recognize that the points have been updated in response to the movement of the game media. It is desirable to provide the see-through part at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving the game medium are provided between the first place and the second place, the possession to be updated when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. Game media corresponding to the number of points updated when the number of points updated is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on a lending command is large, or when the number of bets is a MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the game medium continues in spite of the end of the update display of the points.

  Further, if the first place and the second place are arranged so that the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction are in a relationship, the game medium is naturally moved from the first place to the second place by its own weight. It can be dropped, and the moving mechanism of the game medium can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is allowed to flow from the first location to the first location in both addition and subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be allowed to flow from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition and subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the game medium, the game medium can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used because the game medium is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, if the pachinko ball 5 balls corresponds to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of the score = 1), when the score is updated, the updated score 5 Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  (43) In the embodiment described above, the launcher (not shown) uses a motor as a drive source, but instead, a solenoid may be used as a drive source. In this case, the origin position sensor may detect the plunger position when the solenoid is in a non-excited state, and the dispensing control unit 17 may determine the various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, both of the step “Sending time of 60 seconds abnormally in customer waiting state” in S101 and the step “Card is being inserted?” In S102 (or “Step of holding point = 0?” In S102A) are included. Instead, only the step "Serial waiting state for 60 seconds has passed?" Of S101, or "Insert card?" In S102 (or "Point 0?" In S102A) is shown instead. Only steps may be used.

  (44) Loading a pachinko ball by driving a conveyance motor at the time of installing the pachinko machine 2 or operating a ball removal motor by operating a ball removal switch provided on a relay board or the like It may be removed. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 receives infrared rays emitted by operating a remote control that is held by an attendant of the game hall, so that the pachinko machine 2 from the card unit 3 is received. When a predetermined command is transmitted to the pachinko machine 2, the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 loads the pachinko ball when the pachinko machine 2 is installed and encloses the pachinko machine by driving the ball removal motor. The ball may be removed.

  (45) In the above-described embodiment, it is used as a five-step variable setting of the jackpot probability or the probability per base figure (settings 1 to 5 in FIGS. 71 (a), (b), and (c)) and an abnormality determination standard. Various reference threshold values (TS threshold values in FIGS. 71 (a), (b), and (c), a base threshold value at the time of low base, a base threshold value at the time of high base, etc.) that can be variably set from an upper server by remote control are shown. However, instead of or in addition thereto, the card unit 3, the pachinko machine 2, or the slot machine 2S may be variably settable. When variably setting is performed in the pachinko machine 2 or the slot machine 2S, a variable setting switch is provided in a board box that houses, for example, a main control board that controls the progress of the game provided in the pachinko machine 2 or the slot machine 2S. When the power is turned on, for example, a variable setting key possessed only by a game hall attendant is inserted into a variable setting switch so that the variable setting operation can be performed. The variably set value is stored in an EEPROM or RAM provided on the main control board. In other words, setting change means (variable setting switch) for changing the setting of reference values for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (big hit probability, probability per base figure at low base, probability per base figure at high base, etc.) Reference value storage means (EEPROM or RAM) for storing the reference value changed by the setting change means, and transmission means for transmitting the reference value changed by the setting change means to the gaming apparatus (card unit 3). May be provided in a gaming machine. Alternatively, the mode may be changed by changing the mode such as the “maintenance mode” described above.

  Further, the above setting may be set from a gaming device. In other words, setting change means (variable setting switch) for changing the setting of reference values for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (big hit probability, probability per base figure at low base, probability per base figure at high base, etc.) A game apparatus comprising: a reference value storage means (EEPROM or RAM) for storing a reference value changed by the setting change means; and a transmission means for transmitting the reference value changed by the setting change means to the gaming machine. You may prepare for.

  Further, the above setting may be set from a host server such as a hall management computer. In other words, setting change means (variable setting switch) for changing the setting of reference values for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (big hit probability, probability per base figure at low base, probability per base figure at high base, etc.) Reference value storage means (EEPROM or RAM) for storing the reference value changed by the setting change means, output means for outputting the reference value changed by the setting change means to the gaming machine, May be provided in the upper server.

  If the pachinko machine 2 or the slot machine 2S is variably set, the set value is transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 or the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3 and stored in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3. To do.

  (46) The contents of the variable setting are not limited to the jackpot occurrence probability or the probability per base figure described above. Various reference values such as the number of prize balls to be paid out with winning in the ball device) may be variably set.

  (47) The above-described control of FIGS. 70 to 73 has been described mainly using the pachinko machine 2 as an example of the target gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko machine 2. The slot machine 2S may be used. In the case of the slot machine 2S, there is a variable setting of a big bonus (BB) internal winning probability corresponding to the variable setting of the jackpot occurrence probability shown in FIG. What can be considered other than the variable setting of the BB internal winning probability includes a replay internal winning probability and a small role internal winning probability. Further, the variable setting of the rush probability to the assist time (AT) may be performed in conjunction with the variable setting of the BB internal winning probability. In addition, as equivalent to TS, in the slot machine 2S, there is the number of games consumed between the previous BB and the current BB.

  In addition, in the case of the slot machine 2S, there is an RT state in which the replay probability is improved, which corresponds to the high base state shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 71 (c), and normal states other than this RT state are shown in FIG. This corresponds to the low base state of (c). And there are an internal winning probability of a small role and a replay internal winning probability as equivalent to the probability per ordinary figure. Further, as the base, there is an additional point given to the player for the number of bets consumed in the game.

  (48) In the above-described embodiment, the setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate (the TS threshold in FIG. 71 (a), 71 (b) and (c) base threshold value) (S755 in FIG. 70 (B)) and the game information transmitting means based on the setting stored in the storage means. The game apparatus (card unit 3) is provided with suitability judging means (S807 to S810 in FIG. 72, S822 and S823 in FIG. 73) for judging whether or not the numerical value of the game information has been appropriate. It was. However, the storage unit and the suitability determination unit may be provided in the upper server, and the abnormality determination may be performed in the upper server.

(49) The invention having the following configuration is disclosed in the embodiment described above.
The gaming machine has a plurality of settings related to the game result value given to the player as a result of the game (settings 1 to 5 such as the big hit probability and the normal figure probability in FIGS. 71 (a) (b) (c)). Selection setting means (variable setting switch) capable of selection setting is provided.

  In the gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display unit in which the display state can be changed, the selection setting means is configured to select the specific gaming state. Can be selected and set.

  The selection setting means includes a normal variation display portion whose display state can be changed, and a normal variable winning in which a winning probability of a game medium is improved when a display result of the normal variation display portion is a predetermined display result. In a gaming machine including a ball device and a special variable display device whose display state changes when a game medium wins the normal variable winning ball device, the display result of the normal variation display unit is the predetermined display result. Probability can be selected and set.

  The selection setting means is opened when the display state of the normal variation display unit that can change the display state, and the display result of the normal variation display unit becomes a predetermined display result determined in advance, and the winning probability of the game medium is improved. Normal variable winning ball device, special variable display device whose display state changes when a game medium wins the normal variable winning ball device, and normal variable winning ball device control means for controlling the opening of the normal variable winning ball device The opening time of the normally variable winning ball apparatus controlled by the normal variable winning ball apparatus control means can be selected and set.

  The selection setting means includes a variable winning ball apparatus (large winning opening) that can be changed between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a variable display unit whose display state can be changed. And a variable winning ball apparatus control means for controlling the variable winning ball apparatus to a first state when a predetermined display result of the display of the variable display section is derived and displayed. The magnitude of the game result value given to the player when the game medium wins the variable winning ball apparatus in the first state can be selected and set.

  The selection setting means is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous for a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display section whose display state can be changed, and a predetermined special condition In the gaming machine that becomes a special gaming state (probability change or short time) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state when is established, the occurrence probability (probability rush rate) of the special gaming state can be selected and set.

  In the gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display section in which the display state can be changed, the selection setting means is configured to use the special gaming state. It is possible to select and set the probability of consecutive occurrences (continuous channel rate).

The selection setting means can be selected and set when the gaming machine is powered on.
The selection setting means can be selected and set during the maintenance mode in a gaming machine provided with mode switching means capable of switching to a maintenance mode from a sales mode in which a player can play a game.

Various modifications can be considered as to what the selection setting means is provided as shown below.
The gaming machine includes setting information transmitting means for transmitting the setting information thus selected and set to the gaming device when the selection setting by the selection setting means is performed.

  The game device determines whether or not the base value as game information generated from the operating gaming machine is an abnormal value (base threshold values in FIGS. 71 (b) and 71 (c)). A plurality of determination value storage means corresponding to each setting (base table with high probability per base figure, threshold table with low base probability per base figure in FIGS. 71B and 71C), and the determination value storage A determination value corresponding to the setting of the gaming machine is specified from the determination values stored in the means, and whether or not the base value generated from the gaming machine using the specified determination value is an abnormal value Abnormality determining means for determining whether or not.

  As to what is provided with the selection setting means, as described below, a gaming device or a higher-level server can be considered in addition to the gaming machine.

  The gaming apparatus is configured to set a game result value given to a player as a result of a game in the gaming machine (settings 1 to 5 such as a jackpot probability or a universal chart probability in FIGS. 71A, 71B, and 71C). ) Is selectable from a plurality of selection setting means (variable setting switch), and transmission means for transmitting the setting information selected and set by the selection setting means to the gaming machine.

  The host server performs settings related to the game result value given to the player as a result of the game in the gaming machine (settings 1 to 5 such as jackpot probability and universal chart probability in FIGS. 71 (a) (b) (c)). Selection setting means (variable setting switch) that can be selected from a plurality of settings, and output means for outputting the setting information selected and set by the selection setting means to the gaming machine.

  Further, the abnormality determination means may be provided in the upper server. In other words, the higher-level server determines whether or not the base value as game information generated from the operating gaming machine is an abnormal value (base threshold values in FIGS. 71 (b) and 71 (c)). A plurality of determination value storage means corresponding to each setting (base table with high probability per base figure, threshold table with low base probability per base figure in FIGS. 71B and 71C), and the determination value storage A determination value corresponding to the setting of the gaming machine is specified from the determination values stored in the means, and whether or not the base value generated from the gaming machine using the specified determination value is an abnormal value Abnormality determining means for determining whether or not.

  (50) The C-ID described above is transmitted and received between the LSI 799 and the card unit 3 every 200 msec. When the card is inserted into the card unit 3 and the card is ejected from the card unit 3. Only occasionally, the C-ID of the card may be transmitted and received.

  (51) In the above-described embodiment, the game machine mode is changed by inserting a test card into the CU 3. The mode may be changed by causing the IR light receiving unit 320 of the CU3 to read the operation signal.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected (connector and connection wiring),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
While the gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) is stopped)
The gaming device, when a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, holds the points stored in the main holding point storage means as the points at the end of the game. Point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 23) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Including instruction information transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception to the current reception Information is transmitted (values of the added ball counter and the subtracted ball counter in FIG. 2, FIG. 21).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmitting means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 2). , FIG. 21),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 2; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at intervals shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 22).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a deviation between the two, a determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 23 to 27 (with prohibition request)),
When the game machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 drives a hitting ball launching motor (not shown)) so as not to play the game with the holding points. And “game prohibition” in FIGS. 25 to 27).

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to an initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 23, 57 (operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the sub-point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the initial value is received. It includes a score initializing means (FIG. 23, FIG. 57 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) for initializing the value of the score.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) A player is provided with a connection portion (connector) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game with a score is possible and a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using the value for gaming (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 23) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to the use in a game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining the consistency with the stored points (FIG. 2; determining the match of the number of game balls);
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming machine sequentially transmits information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than a game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine. Send to
The score update unit sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information sequentially received (main control unit 323, FIG. 21).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, so that the gaming measure has a detailed reflection of the change in the points on the gaming machine side. Point management is possible.

(2-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a communication medium connected to the gaming machine to receive a recording medium (card). A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a player to play a game using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded in A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
When a reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (a big hit probability, a probability per base figure at a low base, a probability per base figure at a high base, etc.) is changed (changed by the host server 801 etc.) A game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine according to the changed reference value;
Game information transmitting means (P-unit communication) for transmitting game information (the number of start times between special prizes (TS), base value at low base, base value at high base, etc.) generated in accordance with the progress of the game to the gaming device Control unit 81),
The gaming device is:
Settings according to a reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate (TS threshold value in FIG. 71 (a), base threshold value in FIGS. 71 (b) and (c)) ) For storing (S755 in FIG. 70B),
Based on the setting stored in the storage means, suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the game information transmission means is appropriate (S807 to S810 in FIG. 72, FIG. 73). S822, S823).

  According to such a configuration, whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate Therefore, it is possible to make a detailed abnormality determination that takes into account what value the reference value is set to, and to take measures against possible gaming machines that may be fraudulent. Can be.

  (2-2) In the gaming system of (2-1) above, when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means (Y in S810, Y in S823), it is inappropriate. It further includes error specifying information output means (S812, S835) for outputting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is output, it is possible to grasp the type of error that has occurred on the game hall side.

(2-3) In the gaming system according to (2-1) or (2-2), the gaming machine includes a business mode (operating mode) in which a player can play a game, and a gaming machine. Can be switched to the maintenance mode (maintenance mode) for performing maintenance.
At least one of the gaming device and the gaming machine has a reference value display control means for controlling the display of the reference value when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode (the set value is displayed on the display 312 in the maintenance mode). A main control unit 323) for performing display control.

  According to such a configuration, since the reference value is displayed when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the reference value can be confirmed on the game hall side.

(2-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-3) above, the gaming machine has a sales mode (operation mode) in which a player can play a game. , Can be switched to the maintenance mode (maintenance mode) for maintenance of the gaming machine,
The gaming apparatus includes an inappropriate history display control unit (maintenance mode) for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode. In some cases, a main control unit 323) that performs control to display an abnormality occurrence history on the display 312 is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the history of the gaming information determined to be inappropriate is displayed. You can check the history.

(2-5) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) capable of communicating with a gaming machine in which a game is played by a player, and accepts a recording medium (card) to the recording medium. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of accumulated balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded. There,
When a reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine (a big hit probability, a probability per base figure at a low base, a probability per base figure at a high base, etc.) is changed (changed by the host server 801 etc.) A game information receiving means for receiving game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game from a gaming machine including a game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine according to the changed reference value. S801 and S819),
Setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game of the gaming machine controlled according to the changed reference value (FIG. 71 (a)) Storage means (S755 in FIG. 70B) for storing the TS threshold of FIG. 71B and the base threshold in FIG.
Based on the setting stored in the storage means, appropriateness determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate (S807 to S810 in FIG. 72, S822 in FIG. 73). , S823).

  According to such a configuration, whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting according to the reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate Therefore, it is possible to make a detailed abnormality determination that takes into account what value the reference value is set to, and to take measures against possible gaming machines that may be fraudulent. Can be.

  (2-6) In the gaming device of (2-5) above, when it is determined that it is inappropriate by the appropriateness determining means (Y in S810, Y in S823), the gaming information determined as inappropriate Error specifying information output means (S812, S835) for outputting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is output, it is possible to grasp the type of error that has occurred on the game hall side.

  (2-7) In the gaming apparatus of (2-5) or (2-6) above, a reference for performing control to display the reference value when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode (maintenance mode) Value display control means (main control unit 323 for performing control to display the set value on the display 312 in the maintenance mode).

  According to such a configuration, since the reference value is displayed when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the reference value can be confirmed on the game hall side.

  (2-8) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (2-5) to (2-7) above, when the gaming machine is in a maintenance mode (maintenance mode), the suitability determination unit improperly Inappropriate history display control means for controlling to display the history of game information determined to be (main control unit 323 for controlling to display the abnormality occurrence history on the display 312 in the maintenance mode).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming machine is in the maintenance mode, the history of the gaming information determined to be inappropriate is displayed. You can check the history.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control part, 20 connection part, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 312 display, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit 321 rent button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 330 connection unit, 292 display control effect control unit, 54 display unit.

Claims (2)

A sealed game machine having a circulation path through which a game is played by a player and circulating the game medium, and a record medium that is communicably connected to the game machine and receives a recording medium and is recorded on the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the identified player-owned valuable value,
The gaming machine is
Game control means for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine according to the changed reference value when the reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine is changed.
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Storage means for storing a setting according to a reference value used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated according to the progress of the game is appropriate;
On the basis of the setting stored in the storage means, suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the game information transmission means is appropriate;
And a display control means for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means. A game is performed by a player, and includes a communication unit capable of communicating with an enclosed game machine having a circulation path for circulating the game medium, and is specified by the recording information received by the recording medium and recorded on the recording medium A gaming device that enables a game on the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player,
When a reference value for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine is changed, the gaming machine includes a game control means for controlling the gaming state of the gaming machine in accordance with the changed reference value according to the progress of the game. Game information receiving means for receiving generated game information;
Storage means for storing a setting according to a reference value used for determining whether or not a numerical value of game information generated in accordance with the progress of the game of the gaming machine controlled according to the changed reference value is appropriate ,
On the basis of the setting stored in the storage means, suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate;
And a display control means for performing control to display a history of game information determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means.

Images